OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL
OOppeerraattiioonn
MMaaiinntteennaannccee
SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publica-
tion. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time
so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to
your specific vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive
(RHD). The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD
models are opposite of those written in this manual.
F2
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in vio-
lation of regulations established by the Department of Transportation and other government
agencies in your country.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely
affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio
manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
DANGER indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous situ-
ation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if
not avoided, could result in vehicle
damage.
NOTICE
WARNING
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who
drive HYUNDAI. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build is something of
which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. It is suggested that you read
it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this HYUNDAI, please
leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
Copyright 2015 HYUNDAI Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor Company.
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do
not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
CAUTION
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight
chapters plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. This Owner's
Manual provides you with many safe-
ty precautions and operating proce-
dures. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that may hurt you
or others, as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Safety messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
these hazards and what to do to
avoid or reduce the risks.
Warnings and instructions contained
in this manual are for your safety.
Failure to follow safety warnings and
instructions can lead to serious injury
or death.
Throughout this manual DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
be used.
This is the safety alert sym-
bol. It is used to alert you to
potential physical injury haz-
ards. Obey all safety mes-
sages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or
death. The safety alert sym-
bol precedes the signal words
DANGER, WARNING and
CAUTION.
HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL
F5
Introduction
DANGER indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
F6
Introduction
NOTICE indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage.
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance,
we recommend you use unleaded
gasoline which has an octane rating of
RON (Research Octane Number) 95 /
AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.
You may use unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of RON 91-94 / AKI
87-90 but it may result in slight per-
formance reduction of the vehicle. (Do
not use methanol blended fuels)
Except Europe
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an Octane
Rating of RON (Research Octane
Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
87 or higher. (Do not use methanol
blended fuels)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
NOTICE
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
WARNING
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental
to the catalytic converter and
will damage the engine control
system’s oxygen sensor and
affect emission control.
Never add any fuel system
cleaning agents to the fuel tank
other than what has been speci-
fied (We recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.)
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moder-
ate injury.
CAUTION
FFUUEELL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS
F7
Introduction
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline.
When you are going to use leaded
gasoline, we recommend that you
ask an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Octane rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine control
system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Other fuels
Using fuel additives such as:
- Silicone fuel additive
- MMT (Magnanese, Mn) fuel additive
- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive
- Other metallic-based fuel additives
may result in cylinder misfire, poor
acceleration, engine stalling, dam-
age to the catalyst, or abnormal cor-
rosion, and may cause damage to
the engine resulting in a reduction in
the overall life of the powertrain.
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the
use of these fuels may not be cov-
ered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
NOTICE
Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol. Discontinue
use of any gasohol product
which impairs drivability.
CAUTION
F8
Introduction
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding
fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in
your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system, engine
control system and emission control
system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
unleaded gasoline which has an
octane rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock
Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or
Octane Rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).
For customers who do not use good
quality gasolines including fuel addi-
tives regularly, and have problems
starting or the engine does not run
smoothly, one bottle of additives added
to the fuel tank at every 15,000km (for
Europe)/ 5,000km (except Europe).
Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover dam-
age to the fuel system and any
performance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels con-
taining methanol or fuels con-
taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
CAUTION
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only
on commercially available diesel fuel
that complies with EN 590 or compa-
rable standard. (EN stands for
"European Norm"). Do not use
marine diesel fuel, heating oils, or
non-approved fuel additives, as this
will increase wear and cause dam-
age to the engine and fuel system.
The use of non-approved fuels and /
or fuel additives will result in a limita-
tion of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is
used in your vehicle. If two types of
diesel fuel are available, use summer
or winter fuel properly according to
the following temperature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type
diesel fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very
carefully : If the engine stops through
fuel failure, the circuits must be com-
pletely purged to permit restarting.
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends
of no more than 7% biodiesel, com-
monly known as "B7 Diesel" may be
used in your vehicle if Biodiesel meets
EN 14214 or equivalent specifications.
(EN stands for "European Norm"). The
use of biofuels exceeding 7% made
from rapeseed methyl ester (RME),
fatty acid methyl ester (FAME), veg-
etable oil methyl ester (VME) etc. or
mixing diesel exceeding 7% with
biodiesel will cause increased wear or
damage to the engine and fuel sys-
tem. Repair or replacement of worn or
damaged components due to the use
of non approved fuels will not be cov-
ered by the manufactures warranty.
F9
Introduction
Do not let any gasoline or water
enter the tank. This would make
it necessary to drain it out and
to bleed the lines to avoid jam-
ming the injection pump and
damaging the engine.
CAUTION
Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the
regulated automotive diesel
fuel for diesel vehicle equipped
with the DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including
high sulfur (more than 50 ppm
sulfur) and unspecified addi-
tives, it can cause the DPF sys-
tem to be damaged and white
smoke can be emitted.
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or other-
wise, that fails to meet the lat-
est petroleum industry speci-
fication.
• Never use any fuel additives
or treatments that are not rec-
ommended or approved by
the vehicle manufacturer.
CAUTION
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you
may add to the performance, econo-
my and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is need-
ed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
HYUNDAI promotes an environmen-
tally sound treatment for end of life
vehicles and offers to take back your
HYUNDAI end of life vehicles in
accordance with the European Union
(EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive.
You can get detailed information
from your national HYUNDAI home-
page.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE BBRREEAAKK--IINN
PPRROOCCEESSSS
RREETTUURRNNIINNGG UUSSEEDD VVEEHHIICCLLEESS
((FFOORR EEUURROOPPEE))
Introduction
F10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety system of your vehicle
Convenient features of your vehicle
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F11
F12F12
Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2
Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3
Interior overview....................................................1-4
Instrument panel overview...................................1-6
Engine compartment .............................................1-8
Important safety precautions...............................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain all children .........................................................2-2
Air bag hazards ................................................................2-2
Driver distraction .............................................................2-2
Control your speed ..........................................................2-3
Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-3
Seats ........................................................................2-4
Safety precautions ..........................................................2-5
Front seats..........................................................................2-6
Rear seats .........................................................................2-12
Headrest ...........................................................................2-16
Seat warmers and air ventilation seats.....................2-20
Seat belts .............................................................2-24
Seat belt safety precautions ......................................2-24
Seat belt warning light .................................................2-25
Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-26
Additional seat belt safety precautions ...................2-31
Care of seat belts ..........................................................2-33
Child restraint system (CRS) ..............................2-34
Children always in the rear .........................................2-34
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-35
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-37
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety system of your vehicle
F13F13
Air bag
- supplemental restraint system ................2-2-46
Where are the air bags? ..............................................2-49
How does the air bags system operate? .................2-52
What to expect after an air bag inflates ................2-56
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat.................................................................2-57
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? ...........2-58
SRS care ...........................................................................2-63
Additional safety precautions .....................................2-64
Air bag warning labels...................................................2-65
Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4
Remote key.........................................................................3-4
Smart key ............................................................................3-8
Immobilizer system .........................................................3-13
Door locks.............................................................3-14
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle ......3-14
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle .........3-16
Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-18
Child-protector rear door locks..................................3-19
Theft-alarm system.............................................3-20
Driver position memory system.........................3-21
Storing memory positions.............................................3-21
Easy access function .....................................................3-22
Steering wheel......................................................3-23
Electric power steering (EPS)......................................3-23
Tilt steering / Telescope steering...............................3-24
Heated steering wheel...................................................3-25
Horn....................................................................................3-25
Mirrors...................................................................3-26
Inside rearview mirror....................................................3-26
Outside rearview mirror ................................................3-27
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
F14F14
Windows ................................................................3-31
Power windows................................................................3-31
Sunroof..................................................................3-37
Sunroof opening and closing.......................................3-37
Sliding the sunroof .........................................................3-37
Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-38
Sunshade...........................................................................3-39
Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-40
Exterior features .................................................3-41
Hood ...................................................................................3-41
Trunk ..................................................................................3-43
Smart trunk.......................................................................3-44
Fuel filler door.................................................................3-48
Instrument cluster................................................3-51
Instrument cluster control ............................................3-53
Gauges ...............................................................................3-54
Odometer...........................................................................3-57
Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-57
LCD display messages....................................................3-71
LCD display (for supervision cluster) ...............3-82
LCD display control.........................................................3-82
LCD modes ........................................................................3-82
User settings mode.........................................................3-86
Trip computer .......................................................3-90
Conventional cluster.......................................................3-90
Supervision cluster .........................................................3-94
Light .......................................................................3-99
Exterior lights ..................................................................3-99
Welcome system ...........................................................3-106
Interior lights..................................................................3-107
Wipers and washers ..........................................3-110
Windshield wipers.........................................................3-110
Windshield washers......................................................3-112
Driver assist system ..........................................3-114
Rear view camera .........................................................3-114
Rear parking assist system ........................................3-115
Parking assist system ..................................................3-118
Defroster.............................................................3-122
Rear window defroster ...............................................3-122
Manual climate control system........................3-123
Heating and air conditioning......................................3-124
System operation..........................................................3-129
System maintenance....................................................3-132
Automatic climate control system...................3-134
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................3-135
Manual heating and air conditioning.......................3-136
System operation..........................................................3-143
System maintenance....................................................3-146
F15F15
Windshield defrosting and defogging ............3-148
Manual climate control system .................................3-148
Automatic climate control system ............................3-149
Defogging logic..............................................................3-150
Auto defogging system ...............................................3-151
Climate control additional features.................3-152
Cluster ionizer................................................................3-152
Sunroof inside air recirculation.................................3-152
Storage compartment........................................3-153
Center console storage ...............................................3-153
Sliding armrest...............................................................3-153
Glove box ........................................................................3-154
Sunglass holder .............................................................3-154
Multi box .........................................................................3-155
Interior features.................................................3-156
Ashtray ............................................................................3-156
Cup holder.......................................................................3-156
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-157
Power outlet...................................................................3-158
USB charger...................................................................3-159
Cigarette lighter ............................................................3-159
Clock.................................................................................3-160
Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-160
Floor mat anchor(s)......................................................3-161
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................3-161
Multimedia system.................................................4-2
Aux, USB and iPod
®®
port ................................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-3
Steering wheel audio control ........................................4-4
Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) .................4-5
Bluetooth
®®
Wireless Technology hands-free ..........4-5
How vehicle radio works.................................................4-6
Audio (Without Touch Screen) ............................4-9
Feature of Your Audio...................................................4-10
Radio Mode (Type A-1, Type A-2, Type A-3,
Type A-4 with RDS)........................................................4-28
Radio Mode (Type A-5, Type A-6).............................4-30
Media Mode......................................................................4-31
Phone Mode ....................................................................4-38
Setup Mode
(Type A-1, Type A-2, Type A-3, Type A-4).............4-40
Setup Mode (Type A-5, Type A-6).............................4-46
4
Multimedia system
F16F16
Audio (With Touch Screen) ................................4-54
Feature of Your Audio...................................................4-55
Radio Mode
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3, Type B-4) ..............4-72
Radio Mode (Type B-5, Type B-6).............................4-74
Media Mode......................................................................4-75
Phone Mode .....................................................................4-90
Bluetooth
®®
Wireless Technology
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3, Type B-4) ..............4-90
Bluetooth
®®
Wireless Technology
(Type B-5, Type B-6).....................................................4-97
Setup Mode
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3, Type B-4) ............4-103
Setup Mode (Type B-5, Type B-6) ..........................4-110
Declaration of Conformity ..............................4-117
FCC ..................................................................................4-117
CE for EU ........................................................................4-119
NCC for Taiwan..............................................................4-121
ACMA for Australia ......................................................4-122
ANATEL for Brazil.........................................................4-124
SMA for Jamaica...........................................................4-127
IFETEL for Mexico........................................................4-128
MOC for Israel ...............................................................4-129
Before driving.........................................................5-4
Before entering the vehicle ...........................................5-4
Before starting...................................................................5-4
Ignition switch ........................................................5-5
Key ignition switch............................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button..............................................5-11
Manual transmission............................................5-20
Manual transmission operation ...................................5-20
Good driving practices...................................................5-22
Automatic transmission.......................................5-24
Automatic transmission operation ..............................5-24
Parking...............................................................................5-29
Good driving practices...................................................5-29
Dual clutch transmission.....................................5-31
Dual clutch transmission operation............................5-31
Parking...............................................................................5-39
Good driving practices...................................................5-39
5
Driving your vehicle
F17F17
Braking system.....................................................5-41
Power brakes ...................................................................5-41
Disc brakes wear indicator...........................................5-42
Rear drum brakes ...........................................................5-42
Parking brake...................................................................5-42
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-45
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-47
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-50
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC).....................................5-52
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) ......................................5-52
Good braking practices..................................................5-53
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system...........................5-54
To activate the ISG system...........................................5-54
To deactivate the ISG system ......................................5-57
ISG system malfunction.................................................5-57
The battery sensor deactivation.................................5-59
Drive mode integrated control system .............5-60
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) ..................5-62
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-63
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-66
Limitations of the system .............................................5-69
Cruise control .......................................................5-71
Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-71
Special driving conditions...................................5-78
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-78
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-78
Smooth cornering ...........................................................5-79
Driving at night................................................................5-79
Driving in the rain ...........................................................5-79
Driving in flooded areas................................................5-80
Highway driving...............................................................5-80
Winter driving.......................................................5-81
Snow or icy conditions ..................................................5-81
Winter Precautions.........................................................5-83
Trailer towing .......................................................5-86
If you decide to pull a trailer.......................................5-87
Trailer towing equipment ..............................................5-91
Driving with a trailer ......................................................5-92
Maintenance when towing a trailer ...........................5-96
Vehicle weight ......................................................5-97
Overloading.......................................................................5-97
F18
Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2
In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-2
If the engine stalls while driving...................................6-2
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .........6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving..............................6-3
If the engine will not start ...................................6-4
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns
over slowly ..........................................................................6-4
If the engine turns over normally but
doesn't start .......................................................................6-4
Jump starting ..........................................................6-4
If the engine overheats ........................................6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......6-10
Check tire pressure .......................................................6-10
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-11
Low tire pressure telltale..............................................6-12
Low tire pressure position and Tire pressure
telltale ................................................................................6-12
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator .....................................................6-13
Changing a tire with TPMS...........................................6-14
If you have a flat tire..........................................6-16
Jack and tools ..................................................................6-16
Changing tires ..................................................................6-17
Jack label...........................................................................6-22
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack......................6-23
Towing ...................................................................6-24
Towing service .................................................................6-24
Removable towing hook ................................................6-25
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-26
Emergency commodity........................................6-28
Fire extinguisher .............................................................6-28
First aid kit ......................................................................6-28
Triangle reflector ............................................................6-28
Tire pressure gauge .......................................................6-28
F18
6
What to do in an emergency
F19
Engine compartment .............................................7-3
Maintenance services ...........................................7-6
Owner's responsibility......................................................7-6
Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-6
Owner maintenance...............................................7-7
Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-8
Scheduled maintenance services ......................7-10
Normal maintenance schedule
- Gasoline engine (For europe) ..................................7-11
Maintenance under severe usage and low mileage
conditions - Gasoline engine (For europe)..............7-14
Normal maintenance schedule
- Gasoline engine (Except europe) ............................7-16
Maintenance under severe usage and low mileage
conditions - Gasoline engine (Except europe)........7-20
Normal maintenance schedule - Diesel engine.......7-22
Maintenance under severe usage and low mileage
conditions - Diesel engine ..........................................7-26
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..7-28
Engine oil ..............................................................7-32
Checking the engine oil level ....................................7-32
Checking the engine oil and filter ..............................7-34
Engine coolant......................................................7-35
Checking the engine coolant level..............................7-35
Changing the coolant.....................................................7-37
Brake/clutch fluid ...............................................7-38
Checking the brake/clutch fluid level........................7-38
Washer fluid .........................................................7-40
Checking the washer fluid level ..................................7-40
Parking brake .......................................................7-41
Checking the parking brake .........................................7-41
Fuel filter (for Diesel).........................................7-41
Draining water from fuel filter....................................7-41
Air cleaner ............................................................7-42
Filter replacement...........................................................7-42
Climate control air filter .....................................7-44
Filter inspection...............................................................7-44
Filter replacement...........................................................7-44
Wiper blades.........................................................7-45
Blade inspection ..............................................................7-45
Blade replacement ..........................................................7-45
Battery...................................................................7-48
For best battery service................................................7-48
Battery capacity label ...................................................7-50
Battery recharging .......................................................7-50
Reset items .......................................................................7-51
F19
7
Maintenance
F20F20
Tires and wheels..................................................7-52
Tire care............................................................................7-52
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.............7-52
Checking tire inflation pressure..................................7-54
Tire rotation .....................................................................7-55
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-56
Tire replacement .............................................................7-56
Wheel replacement.........................................................7-58
Tire traction......................................................................7-58
Tire maintenance ............................................................7-58
Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-58
Low aspect ratio tire......................................................7-63
Fuses......................................................................7-64
Fuse/Relay panel description ......................................7-70
Light bulbs.............................................................7-84
Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and
fog lamp light bulb replacement .................................7-85
Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-91
Headlamp and front fog lamp aiming (for Europe)...7-92
Rear combination lamp bulb replacement ................7-97
High mounted stop lamp replacement.....................7-101
License plate light bulb replacement.......................7-101
Interior light bulb replacement..................................7-102
Appearance care................................................7-103
Exterior care ..................................................................7-103
Interior care ...................................................................7-109
Emission control system ...................................7-111
Crankcase emission control system.........................7-111
Evaporative emission control system ......................7-111
Exhaust emission control system .............................7-112
F21F21
Dimensions..............................................................8-2
Engine......................................................................8-2
Bulb wattage...........................................................8-3
Tires and wheels....................................................8-4
Air conditioning system ........................................8-4
Tire load and speed capacity ..............................8-5
Volume and weight ................................................8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities ...........8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN)....................8-9
Vehicle certification label.....................................8-9
Tire specification and pressure label ...............8-10
Engine number .....................................................8-10
Air conditioner compressor label ......................8-11
Declaration of conformity ..................................8-11
8
Specifications & Consumer information
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2
Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3
Interior overview....................................................1-4
Instrument panel overview...................................1-6
Engine compartment .............................................1-8
1-2
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Hood ..................................................3-41
2. Headlamp ..........................................7-85
3. DRL or fog lamp ................................7-85
4. Tires and wheels ...............................7-52
5. Outside rearview mirror .....................3-27
6. Sunroof ..............................................3-37
7. Front windshield wiper blades ...........7-45
8. Windows ............................................3-31
OAD015001
■ Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)
1
1. Antenna ................................................4-3
2. Doors ..................................................3-14
3. Fuel filler door.....................................3-48
4. Rear parking assist system ..............3-115
5. Rear combination lamp ......................7-97
6. High mounted stop lamp ..................7-101
7. Rearview camera .............................3-114
8. Trunk...................................................3-43
OAD015002
■ Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-4
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-16
2. Driver position memory system ........3-21
3. Outside rearview mirror folding
switch ................................................3-29
4. Outside rearview mirror control
switch ................................................3-28
5. Central door lock switch ....................3-17
6. Power window switches ....................3-31
7. Power window lock switch ................3-35
8. Headlight leveling device ................3-105
9. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ......................................3-53
10. Blind spot detection system button ..5-63
11. ESC OFF button..............................5-47
12. Fuel filler door opener ....................3-48
13. Trunk release lever ..........................3-43
14. Fuse box..........................................7-66
15. Steering wheel ................................3-23
16. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever......3-24
17. Seat ..................................................2-4
18. Hood release lever ..........................3-41
19. Brake pedal ....................................5-41
20. Accelerator pedal
OAD015003L
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Left-hand drive
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)
1
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-16
2. Driver position memory system ........3-21
3. Outside rearview mirror folding
switch ................................................3-29
4. Outside rearview mirror control
switch ................................................3-28
5. Central door lock switch ....................3-17
6. Power window switches ....................3-31
7. Power window lock switch ................3-35
8. Headlight leveling device ................3-105
9. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ......................................3-53
10. Blind spot detection system button ..5-63
11. ESC OFF button..............................5-47
12. Fuel filler door opener ....................3-48
13. Trunk release lever ..........................3-43
14. Fuse box..........................................7-66
15. Steering wheel ................................3-23
16. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever......3-24
17. Seat ..................................................2-4
18. Hood release lever ..........................3-41
19. Brake pedal ....................................5-41
20. Accelerator pedal
OAD015003RE
■ Right-hand drive
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-6
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW (I)
Your vehicle at a glance
OAD015005L
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Left-hand drive
1. Light control / Turn signals .......................3-99
2. Steering wheel audio controls /
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls ................................4-4, 5
3. Instrument cluster ....................................3-51
4. Horn .........................................................3-25
5. Driver's front air bag ................................2-49
6. Wiper/Washer ........................................3-110
7. Cruise controls.........................................5-71
8. Key ignition switch /
Engine Start/Stop button .....................5-6, 11
9. Manual transmission ................................5-20
10. Automatic transmission /
Dual clutch transmission..................5-24, 31
11. Seat warmer / Air ventilation seat..........2-20
12. Heated steering wheel...........................3-25
13. Drive mode integrated control system ...5-60
14. Parking assist system ..........................3-118
15. Idle stop and go (ISG) ...........................5-54
16. Manual climate control /
Automatic climate control system..3-123, 134
17. Passenger's front air bag.......................2-49
18. Glove box.............................................3-154
1-7
Your vehicle at a glance
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW (II)
OAD015005RE
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Right-hand drive
1. Light control / Turn signals .......................3-99
2. Steering wheel audio controls /
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls ................................4-4, 5
3. Instrument cluster ....................................3-51
4. Horn .........................................................3-25
5. Driver's front air bag ................................2-49
6. Wiper/Washer ........................................3-110
7. Cruise controls.........................................5-71
8. Key ignition switch /
Engine Start/Stop button .....................5-6, 11
9. Manual transmission ................................5-20
10. Automatic transmission /
Dual clutch transmission..................5-24, 31
11. Seat warmer / Air ventilation seat..........2-20
12. Heated steering wheel...........................3-25
13. Drive mode integrated control system ...5-60
14. Parking assist system ..........................3-118
15. Idle stop and go (ISG) ...........................5-54
16. Manual climate control /
Automatic climate control system..3-123, 134
17. Passenger's front air bag.......................2-49
18. Glove box.............................................3-154
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1-8
Your vehicle at a glance
OAD075100L/OAD075101L
■
Gasoline Engine (Nu 2.0 MPI)
1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-36
2. Radiator cap ......................................7-35
3. Brake
/clutch fluid reservoir ..............7-38
4. Air cleaner ........................................7-42
5. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-32
6. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-33
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir......7-40
8. Fuse box............................................7-66
9. Battery ..............................................7-48
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■
Gasoline Engine (Gamma 1.6 MPI)
1-9
Your vehicle at a glance
1
OAD075001
■
Diesel Engine (UII 1.6 TCI)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-36
2. Radiator cap ......................................7-35
3. Brake
/clutch fluid reservoir ..............7-38
4. Air cleaner ........................................7-42
5. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-32
6. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-33
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir......7-40
8. Fuse box............................................7-66
9. Battery ..............................................7-48
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Important safety precautions...............................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain all children .........................................................2-2
Air bag hazards ................................................................2-2
Driver distraction .............................................................2-2
Control your speed ..........................................................2-3
Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-3
Seats ........................................................................2-4
Safety precautions ..........................................................2-5
Front seats..........................................................................2-6
Rear seats .........................................................................2-12
Headrest ...........................................................................2-16
Seat warmers and air ventilation seats.....................2-20
Seat belts .............................................................2-24
Seat belt safety precautions ......................................2-24
Seat belt warning light .................................................2-25
Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-26
Additional seat belt safety precautions ...................2-31
Care of seat belts ..........................................................2-33
Child restraint system (CRS) ..............................2-34
Children always in the rear .........................................2-34
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-35
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-37
Air bag
- supplemental restraint system.....................2-46
Where are the air bags? ..............................................2-49
How does the air bags system operate? .................2-52
What to expect after an air bag inflates ................2-56
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat.................................................................2-57
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? ...........2-58
SRS care ...........................................................................2-63
Additional safety precautions .....................................2-64
Air bag warning labels...................................................2-65
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2-2
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this man-
ual.The safety precautions in this sec-
tion are among the most important.
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
Restrain all children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
Air bag hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not prop-
erly restrained. Infants, young chil-
dren, and short adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.
Driver distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, espe-
cially for inexperienced drivers. Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driv-
ing. To reduce your risk of distraction
and an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-
tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and conditions per-
mit safe use. NEVER text or email
while driving. Most countries have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some countries and cities also pro-
hibit drivers from using handheld
phones.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Safety system of your vehicle
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving. You
have a responsibility to your passen-
gers and others on the road to
always drive safely, with your hands
on the wheel as well as your eyes
and attention on the road.
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current condi-
tions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condi-
tion
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such prob-
lems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.
2
2-4
SEATS
Safety system of your vehicle
OAD035001L
Front seat
1. Forward and backward
2. Seatback angle
3. Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)
4. Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
5. Seat warmer or Air ventilation seat *
6. Headrest
Rear seat
7. Seat warmer*
8. Armrest
9. Carrying long/narrow cargo*
10. Seatback angle and folding*
11. Headrest
* : if equipped
Power seat
Manual seat
2-5
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Safety precautions
Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-
ting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.
Air bags
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates. Move
your seat as far back as possible
from front air bags, while still main-
taining control of the vehicle.
Do not use a cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and the passenger. The passen-
ger's hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate properly.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far
to the rear as possible while
maintaining the ability to main-
tain full control of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger
seat as far to the rear as possi-
ble.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o’clock
and 3 o’clock positions to min-
imize the risk of injuries to
your hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or any-
one between the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.
2-6
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate child restraint
systems. Children who have outgrown
a booster seat and adults must be
restrained using the seat belts.
Front seats
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion. Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride in a passenger’s
lap.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck, across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver’s foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-7
Safety system of your vehicle
Manual adjustment
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
2
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion for-
ward may cause strong pres-
sure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
CAUTION
(Continued)
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seat-
back.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between
the seat and the center con-
sole. Your hands might be cut
or injured by the sharp edges
of the seat mechanism.
• If there are occupants in the
rear seats, be careful while
adjusting the front seat posi-
tion.
OAD035002
2-8
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Safety system of your vehicle
OAD035003
NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-9
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat cushion height
(for front seats, if equipped)
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down the lever several times,
to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up the lever several times, to
raise the seat cushion.
Power adjustment
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion. Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.
2
OAD035004
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the
seats when the seat has been
adjusted as far forward or
rearward as possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the
engine is turned off. This may
result in unnecessary battery
drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time. This
may result in an electrical mal-
function.
CAUTION
NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
engine is turned off.
WARNING
NEVER ride with a reclined seat-
back when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-10
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat-
back reaches the desired position.
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Safety system of your vehicle
OAD035005 OAD035006
2-11
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
1. Push the front portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion.
Push the rear portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the height of the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support
• The lumbar support can be adjust-
ed by pressing the lumbar support
switch.
• Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support or
the rear portion of the switch (2) to
decrease support.
The lumbar support does not operate
up or down when the lumbar support
is in the rearmost position.
In this case, to use the system, slightly
increase support by pushing the front
portion of the switch (1).
OAD035007 OAD035008
2-12
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front seatbacks.
Rear seats
Folding the rear seat
(if equipped)
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
the lowest position.
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and injure
occupants.
CAUTION
OAD035017
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward
and cause injury or damage
during sudden stops.
WARNING
OAD035019
2-13
Safety system of your vehicle
3. Pull on the seatback folding lever
(1) located in the trunk.
4. Fold the seatback toward the front
of the vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback rearward. Pull the
seatback firmly until it clicks into
place. Make sure the seatback is
locked in place.
When you return the seatback to
its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by push-
ing on the top of the seatback.
2
OAD035021
OAD035022
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
When returning the rear seat-
back from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seat-
back. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
2-14
Safety system of your vehicle
Armrest
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down from the seatback to use it.
Carrying long/narrow cargo
(if equipped)
Additional cargo space is provided to
accommodate long/narrow cargo
(skis, poles, etc.) not able to fit prop-
erly in the trunk when closed.
1. Pull the armrest down.
2. Pull the cover down while pushing
the release lever down.
OAD035023
Make sure the engine is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park), and the
parking brake is securely applied
whenever loading or unloading
cargo. Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if
the shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
WARNING
OAD035060L
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from being
thrown about the vehicle in a
collision and causing injury to
the vehicle occupants. Do not
place objects in the rear seats,
since they cannot be properly
secured and may hit the front
seat occupants in a collision.
WARNING
Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transmission is in P
(Park) and the parking brake is
securely applied whenever load-
ing or unloading cargo.
Failure to take these steps may
allow the vehicle to move if the
shift lever is inadvertently moved
to another position.
WARNING
• Be careful when loading
cargo through the rear pas-
senger seats to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
CAUTION
2-16
Safety system of your vehicle
Headrest
The vehicle’s front and rear seats
have adjustable headrests.The head-
rests provide comfort for passengers,
but more importantly they are
designed to help protect passengers
from whiplash and other neck and
spinal injuries during an accident,
especially in a rear impact collision.
To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the headrests.
NOTICE
When there is no occupant in
the rear seats, adjust the height
of the headrest to the lowest
position. The rear seat headrest
can reduce the visibility of the
rear area.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your headrests:
• Always properly adjust the
headrests for all passengers
BEFORE starting the vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat
with the headrest removed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
Adjust the headrests so the
middle of the headrests is at
the same height as the height
of the top of the eyes.
• NEVER adjust the headrest
position of the driver’s seat
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Adjust the headrest as close
to the passenger’s head as
possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the headrest locks
into position after adjusting it.
WARNING
OLF034072N
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Front seat headrests
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats are equipped with adjustable
headrests for the passengers safety
and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint
and seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
NOTICE
ODH033105L
OAD035010
OLF034015
2-18
Safety system of your vehicle
Removal/Reinstall
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with using
the seatback angle switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up
(4).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Recline the seatback.
2. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropri-
ate height.
NEVER allow anyone to travel in a
seat with the headrest removed.
WARNING
OAD035011
OAD035012
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD035013
OAD035014
■ Type A
■ Type B
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
2
4. Recline the seatback (4) with the
seatback angle switch (3).
Rear seat headrests
The rear seats are equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the passenger’s safety and com-
fort.
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
ODH033106L
* : if equipped
*
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after rein-
stalling and adjusting it properly.
WARNING
OAD035018
2-20
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat warmers and air ventila-
tion seats
Front seat warmers (if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or
gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
air ventilation system.
NOTICE
The seat warmers can cause a
SERIOUS BURN, even at low
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect tem-
perature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme cau-
tion, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in oper-
ation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, caus-
ing a burn or damage to the seat.
WARNING
2-21
Safety system of your vehicle
2
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the dri-
ver's seat or front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignitions
switch is in the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
i
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
OAD035061L
2-22
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat warmers and air ventilation
seats (if equipped)
The seat warmers and air ventilation
seats are provided to warm or cool
the front seats by blowing air through
small vent holes on the surface of the
seat cushions and seatbacks.
When the operation of the seat
warmers or air ventilation seat are
not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
While the engine is running, push the
switch to warm or cool the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat (if
equipped).
• Each time you push the switch, the
airflow changes as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer or air ventilation seat oper-
ating, the seat warmer will turn
OFF.
• The seat warmers or air ventilation
seats defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition switch is
placed to the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
i
OAD035016
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
■ Seat warmer
■ Air ventilation seat
OAD035072L
To prevent damage to the seat
warmer, air ventilation seat and
seats:
• Use the seat warmer and air
ventilation seat ONLY when
the climate control system is
on. Using the seat warmer and
air ventilation seat for pro-
longed periods of time with
the climate control system off
could cause the seat warmer
and air ventilation seat to mal-
function.
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alco-
hol or gasoline to clean the
seats.
(Continued)
CAUTION
2-23
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Rear seat warmers (if equipped)
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the rear
seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
i
(Continued)
• Avoid spilling liquids on the
surface of the front seats and
seatbacks; this may cause the
air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Do not place materials such
as plastic bags or newspa-
pers under the seats. They
may block the air intake caus-
ing the air vents to not work
properly.
• Do not change the seat cov-
ers. It may damage the seat
warmer or air ventilation seat.
• If the air vents do not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is
no change, we recommend
that you have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OAD035024
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
→
2-24
Safety system of your vehicle
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when
using seat belts.
Seat belt safety precautions
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fas-
tened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags (if equipped) are
designed to supplement the seat belt
as an additional safety device, but
they are not a substitute. Most coun-
tries require all occupants of a vehicle
to wear seat belts.
SEAT BELTS
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
• NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If
a child age 13 or older must be
seated in the front seat, move
the seat as far back as possi-
ble and properly restrain them
in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
• Never wear a seat belt over
fragile objects. If there is a
sudden stop or impact, the
seat belt can damage it.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
(Continued)
2-25
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belt warning light
Seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the driver's
seat belt warning lights will illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds each time
you place the ignition switch ON
regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position or if it is disconnected
after the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, the corresponding seat
belt warning light will illuminate until
the belt is fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 9 km/h (5
mph), the warning light will illuminate
until you drive under 6 km/h (3 mph).
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 20 km/h (12
mph) the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 100 sec-
onds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-
aged webbing.
• Damaged hardware.
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent.
WARNING
(Continued)
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
OLMB033022
■ For driver in instrument cluster
2-26
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt restraint system
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2).
There will be an audible "click" when
the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt
portion is adjusted manually so that it
fits snugly around your hips. If you
lean forward in a slow, easy motion,
the belt will extend and move with
you. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position.
It will also lock if you try to lean for-
ward too quickly.
If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
NOTICE
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front pas-
senger's seat belt warning sys-
tem. It is important for the driver
to instruct the passenger as to
the proper seating instructions
as contained in this manual.
WARNING
ODH033055
2-27
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
four different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near-
est the door, not over your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.
OLMB033025
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident. Take the fol-
lowing precautions when adjust-
ing the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly. This
allows your strong pelvic bones
to absorb the force of the crash,
reducing the chance of internal
injuries.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illus-
tration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into locked posi-
tion at the appropriate height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
OAD035027
■ Front seat
2-28
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear center seatbelt
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
Information
If you are not able to pull out the safe-
ty belt from the retractor, firmly pull
the belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the belt
out smoothly.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not twist-
ed, then try again.
i
OAD035028
Always have the metal tab
inserted into the buckle.
WARNING
ODH033057
2-29
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(Driver and front passenger,
if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's Pre-tensioner
Seat Belts. The purpose of the pre-
tensioner is to make sure the seat
belts fit tightly against the occupant's
body in certain frontal collisions. The
pre-tensioner seat belts may be acti-
vated in crashes where the frontal col-
lision is severe enough, together with
the air bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
ODH033058
• Always wear your seat belt and
sit properly in your seat.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not pro-
tect you properly in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-ten-
sioners after activation or an
accident.
• NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself. This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Do not hit the seat belt assem-
blies.
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
deploys during a collision, the
pre-tensioner can become hot
and can burn you.
WARNING
Body work on the front area of
the vehicle may damage the
pre-tensioner seat belt system.
Therefore, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
2-30
Safety system of your vehicle
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents. Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Retractor pre-tensioner
(3) SRS control module
The sensor that activates the SRS
air bag is connected with the
pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS
air bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed to the ON
position, and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illu-
minate even if the SRS air bag is
not malfunctioning. If the warning
light does not illuminate, stays illu-
minated or illuminates when the
vehicle is being driven, we recom-
mend the pre-tensioner seat belts
and/or SRS air bags be inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in certain
frontal or side collisions.
• The pre-tensioners will be acti-
vated even if the seat belts are
not worn at the time of the colli-
sion.
• When the pre-tensioner seat
belts are activated, a loud noise
may be heard and fine dust,
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal
operating conditions and are not
hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
prolonged periods. Wash all
exposed skin areas thoroughly
after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated.
NOTICENOTICE
OLMB033040/Q
2-31
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Additional seat belt safety pre-
cautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, rout-
ed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the lap belt
below your belly so that it fits SNUGLY
across your hips and pelvic bone,
under the rounded part of the belly.
Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
Most countries have child restraint
laws which require children to travel
in approved child restraint devices,
including booster seats. The age at
which seat belts can be used instead
of child restraints differs among
countries, so you should be aware of
the specific requirements in your
country, and where you are travel-
ling. Infant and child restraints must
be properly placed and installed in a
rear seat. For more information refer
to the “Child Restraint Systems” in
this chapter.
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat by a
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards
of your country. Before buying any
child restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets
Safety Standard of your country. The
restraint must be appropriate for your
child's height and weight. Check the
label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to “Child Restraint
Systems” in this chapter.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, preg-
nant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or over the area of
the abdomen where the unborn
child is located.
WARNING
ALWAYS properly restrain infants
and small children in a child
restraint appropriate for the
child’s height and weight.
(Continued)
(Continued)
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving. The violent
forces created during an acci-
dent will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
2-32
Safety system of your vehicle
• Always make sure larger chil-
dren’s seat belts are worn and
properly adjusted.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.
WARNING
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat must
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoul-
der and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt
out of position. Children are afforded
the most safety in the event of an
accident when they are restrained by
a proper restraint system and/or seat
belts in the rear seat.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rear-
most position.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck, they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat.
Seat belt use and injured people
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific rec-
ommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
During an accident, you could be
thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
2-33
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. We recommend
that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Driver and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-34
Safety system of your vehicle
Children always in the rear
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to min-
imize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Children too large for a
Child Restraint System must use the
seat belts provided.
Most countries have Child Restraint
Systems which require children to
travel in approved Child Restraint
Systems. The laws governing the
age or height/weight restrictions at
which seat belts can be used instead
of Child Restraint System differs
among countries, so you should be
aware of the specific requirements in
your country, and where you are trav-
elling.
Child Restraint Systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available Child Restraint System
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child Restraint Systems are general-
ly designed to be secured in a vehi-
cle seat by lap belt or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a
top-tether and/or ISOFIX anchorage
in the rear seats of the vehicle.
Child Restraint System (CRS)
always in the rear
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rearward-
facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the rear
seat of the vehicle. Read and comply
with the instructions for installation
and use provided by the manufacturer
of the Child Restraint System.
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
• Always follow the Child Restraint
System manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the Child Restraint
System.
• Do not use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that “hooks”
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate protection in an
accident.
• After an accident, we recom-
mend a HYUNDAI dealer check
the Child Restraint System, seat
belts, ISOFIX anchorages and
top-tether anchorages.
WARNING
Always properly restrain chil-
dren in the rear seats of the
vehicle, unless the air bag on
the front passenger seat is
deactivated.
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front pas-
senger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH.
WARNING
2-35
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Safety Standards of your country.
• Select a Child Restraint System
based on your child’s height and
weight. The required label or the
instructions for use typically pro-
vide this information.
• Select a Child Restraint System
that fits the vehicle seating position
where it will be used.
• Read and comply with the warn-
ings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the Child
Restraint System.
Child Restraint System types
There are three main types of Child
Restraint Systems: rearward-facing
seats, forward-facing seats, and
booster seats. They are classified
according to the child’s age, height
and weight.
Rearward-facing Child Restraint
System
A rearward-facing Child Restraint
System provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of
the child. The harness system holds
the child in place, and in an accident,
acts to keep the child positioned in the
Child Restraint Systems and reduce
the stress to the fragile neck and
spinal cord.
OLMB033041
2-36
Safety system of your vehicle
All children under the age of one year
must always ride in a rearward-facing
Child Restraint System. There are dif-
ferent types of rearward-facing Child
Restraint Systems: infant-only Child
Restraint Systems can only be used
rearward-facing. Convertible and 3-in-
1 Child Restraint Systems typically
have higher height and weight limits
for the rearward-facing position, allow-
ing you to keep your child rearward-
facing for a longer period of time.
Keep using Child Restraint Systems
in the rearward-facing position as long
as children fit within the height and
weight limits allowed by the Child
Restraint System's manufacturer.
Forward-facing Child Restraint
System
A forward-facing Child Restraint
System provides restraint for the
child’s body with a harness. Keep chil-
dren in a forward-facing Child
Restraint System with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your Child Restraint
System’s manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forward-
facing Child Restraint System, your
child is ready for a booster seat.
Booster seats
A booster seat is Child Restraint
System designed to improve the fit of
the vehicle’s seat belt system. A boost-
er seat positions the seat belt so that it
fits properly over the stronger parts of
your child’s body. Keep your children in
booster seats until they are big
enough to fit in a seat belt properly.
For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap
belt must lie comfortable across the
upper thighs, not the stomach. The
shoulder belt should lie comfortable
across the shoulder and chest and
not across the neck or face. Children
under age 13 must always be proper-
ly restrained to minimize the risk of
injury in an accident, sudden stop or
sudden maneuver.
OAD035029
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
After selecting a proper Child Restraint
System and checking that the Child
Restraint System fits properly in the
rear of this vehicle, you are ready to
install the Child Restraint System
according to the manufacturer’s
instruction. There are three general
steps in installing the Child Restraint
Systems properly:
• Properly secure the Child
Restraint System to the vehicle.
All Child Restraint System must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
belt or lap part of a lap/shoulder
belt or with the ISOFIX top-tether
and/or ISOFIX anchorage.
• Make sure the Child Restraint
System is firmly secured. After
installing a Child Restraint System
to the vehicle, push and pull the
seat forward and from side-to-side
to verify that it is securely attached
to the seat. A Child Restraint
System secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-
side movement can be expected.
When installing a Child Restraint
System, adjust the vehicle seat (up
and down, forward and rearward)
so that your child fits in the Child
Restraint System in a comfortable
manner.
• Secure the child in the Child
Restraint System. Make sure the
child is properly strapped in the
Child Restraint System according
to the Child Restraint System man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
Before installing your Child
Restraint System always:
Read and follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer of
the Child Restraint System.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a Child
Restraint System, the headrest
of the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
WARNING
A Child Restraint System in a
closed vehicle can become very
hot. To prevent burns, check the
seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the
Child Restraint System.
CAUTION
2-38
Safety system of your vehicle
ISOFIX anchorage and top-teth-
er anchorage (ISOFIX anchor-
ages system) for children
The ISOFIX system holds a Child
Restraint System during driving and
in an accident. This system is
designed to make installation of the
Child Restraint System easier and
reduce the possibility of improperly
installing your Child Restraint
System. The ISOFIX system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attach-
ments on the Child Restraint System.
The ISOFIX system eliminates the
need to use seat belts to secure the
Child Restraint System to the rear
seats.
ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are two
lower anchors for each ISOFIX seat-
ing position that will accommodate a
Child Restraint System with lower
attachments.
To use the ISOFIX system in your
vehicle, you must have a Child
Restraint System with ISOFIX attach-
ments. (An ISOFIX Child Restraint
System may only be installed if it has
vehicle-specific or universal approval
in accordance with the requirements
of ECE-R44 or ECE-R129.)
The Child Restraint System manu-
facturer will provide you with instruc-
tions on how to use the Child
Restraint System with its attach-
ments for the ISOFIX anchorages.
ISOFIX anchorages have been pro-
vided in the left and right outboard
rear seating positions. Their locations
are shown in the illustration. There
are no ISOFIX anchorages provided
for the center rear seating position.
OLM039035
2-39
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The ISOFIX anchorages symbols
are located on the left and right rear
seat cushions to identify the position
of the ISOFIX anchorages in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
Both rear outboard seats are equipped
with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as
well as a corresponding top-tether
anchorage on the back side of the rear
seats.
(Child Restraint Systems with univer-
sal approval according to ECE-R44
or ECE-R129 need to be fixed addi-
tionally with a top-tether connected to
the back side of the rear seats.)
ISOFIX anchorages are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
To use the ISOFIX anchorages, push
the upper portion of the ISOFIX
anchorage cover.
Do not attempt to install a Child
Restraint System using ISOFIX
anchorages in the rear center
seating position. There are no
ISOFIX anchorages provided for
this seat. Using the outboard seat
anchorages, for the CRS installa-
tion on the rear center seating
position, can damage the anchor-
ages.
WARNING
OAD035032
ISOFIX Anchorage
Position Indicator
ISOFIX Lower
Anchorage
2-40
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a Child Restraint
System with the “ISOFIX
Anchorage System”
To install a ISOFIX-compatible Child
Restraint System in either of the rear
outboard seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the ISOFIX anchorages.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the
Child Restraint System and the
ISOFIX anchorages.
3. Place the Child Restraint System
on the vehicle seat, then attach the
seat to the ISOFIX anchorages
according to the instructions provid-
ed by the Child Restraint System
manufacturer.
4. Follow the instructions of the Child
Restraint System's manufacturer
for proper installation and connec-
tion of the ISOFIX attachments on
the Child Restraint System to the
ISOFIX anchorages.
Take the following precautions
when using the ISOFIX system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your Child Restraint System.
• To prevent the child from reach-
ing and taking hold of unre-
tracted seat belts, buckle all
unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around their
neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
Child Restraint System to a
single anchorage. This could
cause the anchor or attach-
ment to come loose or break.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always have the ISOFIX sys-
tem inspected by your dealer
after an accident. An accident
can damage the ISOFIX system
and may not properly secure
the Child Restraint System.
WARNING
2-41
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Securing a Child Restraint
System seat with “Top-tether
Anchorage” system
Child Restraint hook holders are
located on the package tray.
1. Route the Child Restraint System
seat strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rest, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
2. Connect the top-tether to the top-
tether anchorage, then tighten the
top-tether according to the instruc-
tions of your Child Restraint
System's manufacturer to firmly
attach the Child Restraint System
to the seat.
OAD035030
OAD035031
Take the following precautions
when installing the top-tether:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your Child Restraint System.
• NEVER attach more than one
Child Restraint System to a
single ISOFIX top-tether
anchorage. This could cause
the anchorage or attachment
to come loose or break.
• Do not attach the top-tether to
anything other than the cor-
rect top-tether anchorage. It
may not work properly if
attached to something else.
• Child Restraint anchorages
are designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted Child Restraint
System.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING
2-42
Safety system of your vehicle
Child Seat Restraint for Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Suitability of each seating position for ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations.
Mass Group Size Class Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Front Passenger
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Center
Carrycot
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
0 : UP to 10kg E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
0+ : UP to 13kg
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
I : 9 to 18kg
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
B ISO/F2 - IUF, IL IUF, IL -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF, IL IUF, IL -
A ISO/F3 - IUF, IL IUF, IL -
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the
"specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Securing a Child Restraint
System with a lap/shoulder belt
When not using the ISOFIX system,
all Child Restraint Systems must be
secured to a rear seat with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt.
Installing a Child Restraint System
with a lap/shoulder belt
To install a Child Restraint System
on the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the Child Restraint System
on a rear seat and route the lap/
shoulder belt around or through
the restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Make sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
Information
When using the rear center seat belt,
you should also refer to the “3-point
Rear Center Seat Belt” in this chapter.
i
OLMB033044
2-44
Safety system of your vehicle
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Information
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the Child Restraint System
while feeding the shoulder belt
back into the retractor.
4. Push and pull on the Child
Restraint System to confirm that
the seat belt is holding it firmly in
place.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you use a ISOFIX top-
tether anchorage with the lap/shoul-
der belt, see page 2-41.
To remove the Child Restraint System,
press the release button on the buckle
and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out
of the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully
i
OLMB033045 OLMB033046
2-45
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Child Seat Restraint Suitability for Seat Position using the Seat Belt
Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations
Use Child Restraint Systems that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children.
When using the Child Restraint Systems, refer to the following table.
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
UF : Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
Mass Group
Seating Position
FRONT
Passenger
REAR
Outboard
REAR
Center
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
X U U
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
X U U
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
X U U
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
X U U
2-46
Safety system of your vehicle
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OAD035033L
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver’s front air bag*
2. Passenger’s front air bag*
3. Side air bag*
4. Curtain air bag*
5. Driver’s knee air bag *
* : if equipped
■ Left-hand drive
2-47
Safety system of your vehicle
2
OAD035033R
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver’s front air bag*
2. Passenger’s front air bag*
3. Side air bag*
4. Curtain air bag*
5. Driver’s knee air bag *
* : if equipped
■ Right-hand drive
2-48
Safety system of your vehicle
Vehicles are equipped with a
Supplemental Air Bag System for the
driver’s seat and front passenger’s
seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,
everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.
WARNING
2-49
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Where are the air bags?
Driver’s and passenger’s air
bags (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both
the driver and passenger seating
positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel and the passenger's side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the let-
ters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad
covers.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and front passen-
gers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone in case of a frontal impact of suf-
ficient severity.
OAD035034
OAD035039
■ Driver’s front air bag
OAD035035
■ Driver’s knee air bag
■ Passenger’s front air bag
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
front air bags, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs on
the dashboard.
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box. Such objects could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
WARNING
2-50
Safety system of your vehicle
Side air bags (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat. The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle’s
driver and the front passenger with
additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
OAD035040
OAD035041
(Continued)
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers.This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
this may cause the side air
bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side air bag, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9
o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injuries
to your hands and arms.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-51
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Curtain air bags (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact situations.
OAD035042
OAD035043
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bags, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
• Properly secure child restraints
as far away from the door as
possible.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.
WARNING
2-52
Safety system of your vehicle
How does the air bags system
operate?
The SRS consists of the following
components:
(1) Driver's front air bag module
(2) Passenger's front air bag module
(3) Side air bag modules
(4) Curtain air bag modules
(5) Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
blies
(6) Air bag warning light
(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
(8) Front impact sensors
(9) Side impact sensors
(10) Side Pressure sensors
The SRSCM continually monitors
SRS components while the ignition
switch is in the ON position to deter-
mine if a crash impact is severe
enough to require air bag deploy-
ment or pre-tensioner seat belt
deployment.
SRS warning light
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position,
after which the air bag warning light
should go out.
ODH033104L/Q
If your SRS malfunctions, the
air bag may not inflate properly
during an accident increasing
the risk of serious injury or
death.
If any of the following condi-
tions occur, your SRS is mal-
functioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-53
Safety system of your vehicle
2
During a frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s deceleration. If the
rate of deceleration is high enough,
the control unit will inflate the front air
bags, at the time and with the force
needed.
The front air bags help protect the
driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in
which seat belts alone cannot provide
adequate restraint. When needed,
the side air bags help provide protec-
tion in the event of a side impact.
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of cer-
tain frontal or side collisions to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision it’s direction etc. These two
factors determine whether the sen-
sors produce an electronic deploy-
ment/inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an acci-
dent. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
(Continued)
• The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately six
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
We recommend that an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the
SRS as soon as possible if any
of these conditions occur.
2-54
Safety system of your vehicle
• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The
speed of air bag inflation is a con-
sequence of extremely short time
in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu-
pant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
cially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. The greatest risk is sitting too
close to the air bag. An air bag needs
space to inflate. It is recommended
that drivers sit as far as possible
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest while still main-
taining control of the vehicle.
When the SRSCM detects a suffi-
ciently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.
OLMB033054
■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
2-55
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the front pas-
senger's forward motion, reducing
the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibili-
ty and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
OLMB033055
■ Driver’s front air bag (2)
OLMB033056
■ Driver’s front air bag (3)
OLMB033057
■ Passenger’s front air bag
To prevent objects from becom-
ing dangerous projectiles when
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box where the pas-
senger's air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.
WARNING
2-56
Safety system of your vehicle
What to expect after an air bag
inflates
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.
(Continued)
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with luke-
warm water and mild soap.
• We recommend that an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer replace
the air bag immediately after
deployment. Air bags are
designed to be used only once.
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and
doors as soon as possible
after impact to reduce pro-
longed exposure to the smoke
and powder released by the
inflating air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag stor-
age area’s internal compo-
nents immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-57
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and may produce
smoke and powder in the air inside of
the vehicle. This is normal and is a
result of the ignition of the air bag
inflator. After the air bag inflates, you
may feel substantial discomfort in
breathing because of the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and
the air bag, as well as from breathing
the smoke and powder. The powder
may aggravate asthma for some
people. If you experience breathing
problems after an air bag deploy-
ment, seek medical attention imme-
diately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and seek
medical attention if the symptoms
persist.
Do not install a child restraint
on the front passenger seat
Never install a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. An inflating
air bag can forcefully strike a child or
restraint resulting in serious or fatal
injury.
OYDESA2042
OLM034310
■ Type A
■ Type B
• Extreme hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air
bag in front of it!
• NEVER use a rearward facing
child restraint on a seat pro-
tected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG
in front of it, DEATH or SERI-
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
• Never put a child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat. If
the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause seri-
ous or fatal injuries.
WARNING
2-58
Safety system of your vehicle
Why didn't my air bag go off in
a collision?
Air bags are not designed to inflate in
every collision.
There are certain types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional protec-
tion. These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle
indicates a collision energy absorp-
tion, and is not an indicator of whether
or not an air bag should have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
(if equipped)
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sen-
sors. If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
non-genuine part. This may
adversely affect the collision
and air bag deployment per-
formance.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Place the ignition switch to
the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-
tion, when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• We recommend that all air bag
repairs are conducted by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
2-59
Safety system of your vehicle
2
1. SRS control module
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor (Front Door)
4. Side impact sensor (B-pillar)
OAD035044/OAD035055/OAD035056/OAD035057/OAD035058
2-60
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the severity of impact of the front col-
lision.
.
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.
Although the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags are designed to
inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of col-
lisions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions,
but they may inflate in other colli-
sions if the side impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OAD035045
OAD035046
OLF034050
2-61
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.
Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severity
of impact.
OAD035049OAD035048
OAD035047
2-62
Safety system of your vehicle
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to “ride” under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "under-
ride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
“underride” collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
ODH033076 OAD035050 OLF034057
2-63
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the colli-
sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-
cle structure.
SRS care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is in the
ON position, or continuously remains
on, we recommend that the system
be immediately inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
We recommend any work on the
SRS system, such as removing,
installing, repairing, or any work on
the steering wheel, the front passen-
ger's panel, front seats and roof rails
be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling
of the SRS system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
OLF034058
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death take the follow-
ing precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passen-
ger's panel above the glove
box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
• We recommend that inflated
air bags be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-64
Safety system of your vehicle
Additional safety precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the opera-
tion of the supplemental restraint sys-
tem sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position may cause
the air bags to inflate.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
(Continued)
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions
must be observed. Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precau-
tions could increase the risk of
personal injury.
2-65
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bag warning labels are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
Be sure to read all of the information about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owner’s Manual.
Air bag warning labels (if equipped)
OAD035052L/OAD035053
Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4
Remote key.........................................................................3-4
Smart key ............................................................................3-8
Immobilizer system .........................................................3-13
Door locks.............................................................3-14
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle ......3-14
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle .........3-16
Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-18
Child-protector rear door locks..................................3-19
Theft-alarm system.............................................3-20
Driver position memory system.........................3-21
Storing memory positions.............................................3-21
Easy access function .....................................................3-22
Steering wheel......................................................3-23
Electric power steering (EPS)......................................3-23
Tilt steering / Telescope steering...............................3-24
Heated steering wheel...................................................3-25
Horn....................................................................................3-25
Mirrors...................................................................3-26
Inside rearview mirror....................................................3-26
Outside rearview mirror ................................................3-27
Windows ................................................................3-31
Power windows................................................................3-31
Sunroof..................................................................3-37
Sunroof opening and closing.......................................3-37
Sliding the sunroof .........................................................3-37
Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-38
Sunshade...........................................................................3-39
Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-40
Exterior features .................................................3-41
Hood ...................................................................................3-41
Trunk ..................................................................................3-43
Smart trunk.......................................................................3-44
Fuel filler door.................................................................3-48
Instrument cluster................................................3-51
Instrument cluster control ............................................3-53
Gauges ...............................................................................3-54
Odometer...........................................................................3-57
Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-57
LCD display messages....................................................3-71
LCD display (for supervision cluster) ...............3-82
LCD display control.........................................................3-82
LCD modes ........................................................................3-82
User settings mode.........................................................3-86
3
Trip computer .......................................................3-90
Conventional cluster.......................................................3-90
Supervision cluster .........................................................3-94
Light .......................................................................3-99
Exterior lights ..................................................................3-99
Welcome system ...........................................................3-106
Interior lights..................................................................3-107
Wipers and washers ..........................................3-110
Windshield wipers.........................................................3-110
Windshield washers......................................................3-112
Driver assist system ..........................................3-114
Rear view camera .........................................................3-114
Rear parking assist system ........................................3-115
Parking assist system ..................................................3-118
Defroster.............................................................3-122
Rear window defroster ...............................................3-122
Manual climate control system........................3-123
Heating and air conditioning......................................3-124
System operation..........................................................3-129
System maintenance....................................................3-132
Automatic climate control system...................3-134
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................3-135
Manual heating and air conditioning.......................3-136
System operation..........................................................3-143
System maintenance....................................................3-146
Windshield defrosting and defogging ............3-148
Manual climate control system .................................3-148
Automatic climate control system ............................3-149
Defogging logic..............................................................3-150
Auto defogging system ...............................................3-151
Climate control additional features.................3-152
Cluster ionizer................................................................3-152
Sunroof inside air recirculation.................................3-152
Storage compartment........................................3-153
Center console storage ...............................................3-153
Sliding armrest...............................................................3-153
Glove box ........................................................................3-154
Sunglass holder .............................................................3-154
Multi box .........................................................................3-155
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Interior features.................................................3-156
Ashtray ............................................................................3-156
Cup holder.......................................................................3-156
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-157
Power outlet...................................................................3-158
USB charger...................................................................3-159
Cigarette lighter ............................................................3-159
Clock.................................................................................3-160
Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-160
Floor mat anchor(s)......................................................3-161
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................3-161
3
3-4
Convenient features of your vehicle
Remote key
Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Trunk Unlock
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on
the remote key.
3. The doors will lock. The hazard
warning lights will blink. Also, the
outside rearview mirror will fold, if
the outside rearview mirror folding
switch is in the AUTO position (if
equipped).
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)
on the remote key.
2. The doors will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will unfold, if the outside rearview
mirror folding switch is in the
AUTO position (if equipped).
Information
After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
i
ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Unattended children
could place the key in the igni-
tion switch and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
OHG040006L
3-5
Convenient features of your vehicle
Trunk unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Trunk Unlock button (3)
on the remote key for more than
one second.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times. Once the trunk is
opened and then closed, the trunk
will lock automatically.
Information
• After unlocking the trunk, the trunk
will lock automatically.
• The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button for more
than one second.
Start-up
For detailed information refer to “Key
Ignition Switch” in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the remote
key:
• Keep the remote key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the remote key gets
damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction, excluding
the car from the warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote key.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.
Mechanical key
If the remote key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
3
OAD045041L
3-6
Remote key precautions
The remote key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
remote key.
When the remote key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the remote key, it is
recommended that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continue)
(Continue)
If the remote key is in close proximi-
ty to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the remote key and
your mobile phone in the same pants
or jacket pocket and always try to
maintain an adequate distance
between the two devices.
Information
Changes or modifications not express-
ly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. If
the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will not
be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
NOTICE
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
If the remote key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the cover.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
remote key.
If you suspect your remote key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your remote key is not work-
ing correctly, it is recommended that
you contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
and regulation.
i
3
OLM042302
3-8
Smart key
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Trunk Unlock
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Lock button
(1) on the smart key.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink. Also, the outside rearview
mirror will fold, if the outside
rearview mirror folding switch is in
the AUTO position (if equipped).
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Information
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle.
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
OBA043222IN
OAD045001
OAD045001R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is open.
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the Smart Key.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Unlock but-
ton (2) on the smart key.
3. The doors will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will unfold, if the outside rearview
mirror folding switch is in the AUTO
position. (if equipped)
Information
• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is with-
in 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the out-
side door handle. Other people can
also open the doors without the
smart key in possession.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
i
3
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
OAD045001
OAD045001R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-10
Convenient features of your vehicle
Trunk unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the trunk handle but-
ton or press the Trunk Unlock but-
ton (3) on the smart key for more
than one second.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automati-
cally.
Information
After unlocking the trunk, the trunk
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless the trunk is opened.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the Engine
Start/Stop button in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the smart
key:
• Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the smart key gets
damp (due to drinks or moisture),
or is heated, internal circuit may
malfunction, excluding the car
from the warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.
Mechanical key
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
Insert the mechanical key into the
key hole on the door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
NOTICE
i
OAD045042L
3-11
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Loss of a smart key
A maximum of two smart keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you happen to lose your smart key, it
is recommended that you should
immediately take the vehicle and
remaining key to your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle,
if necessary.
Smart key precautions
The smart key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the trans-
mitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your vehi-
cle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the smart key, it is
recommended that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the smart key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and your
mobile phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and always try to main-
tain an adequate distance between
the two devices.
3-12
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Changes or modifications not express-
ly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. If
the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will not
be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
Battery replacement
If the Smart Key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
smart key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.
If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your smart key is not work-
ing correctly, it is recommended that
you contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
and regulation.
i
NOTICE
i
OLF044008
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Immobilizer system
(if equipped)
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the immobilizer sys-
tem indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, the system does not recognize
the coding of the key.
Place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then place the
ignition switch to the ON position
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key. The engine
may not start because the metal may
interrupt the transponder signal from
transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, it is
recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how-
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer sys-
tem malfunction could occur.
NOTICE
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential.
WARNING
3-14
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
If you lock/unlock the driver's door
with a key, all vehicle doors will
lock/unlock automatically. (if equipped
with the central door lock system)
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Remote key
To lock the doors, press the Door
Lock button (1) on the remote key.
To unlock the doors, press the Door
Unlock button (2) on the remote key.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
DOOR LOCKS
OAD045002
OAD045002R
■ Left-hand drive
• Type A • Type B
■ Right-hand drive
• Type A • Type B
OHG040006L
3-15
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
Smart key
To lock the doors, press the button on
the outside door handle while carry-
ing the smart key with you or press
the door lock button on the smart key.
To unlock the doors, press the button
on the outside door handle while car-
rying the smart key with you or press
the door unlock button on the smart
key.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
i
i
OAD045001
OAD045001R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
/
/
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
/
/
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
OBA043224IN
3-16
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, pull the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position.
The red mark (2) on the door lock
button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
key is in the ignition switch and any
front door is open.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
Information
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and manu-
al) while simultaneously pulling on the
door handle.
Operate the other door locks and han-
dles, front and rear.
Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.
i
OAD045003
OAD045003R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
/
/
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
/
/
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
With the central door lock
switch
When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of
the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the lock
button (1) of the central door lock
switch is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the lock
button (1) of the central door lock
switch is pressed.
When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of
the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
OAD045004
OAD045004R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
/
/
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
/
/
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked, the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle in
a crash is increased.
WARNING
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
serious injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Children
might operate features of the
vehicle that could injure them,
or they could encounter other
harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle.
WARNING
3-18
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock
system (if equipped)
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
when vehicle speed exceeds 15
km/h (9 mph).
You can activate or deactivate the
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
the User Settings Mode on the LCD
display. For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.
Always secure your vehicle
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
increases the potential risk to
you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion (for automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission)
or first gear or R (Reverse, for
manual transmission), engage
the parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position, close all windows,
lock all doors, and always take
the key with you.
WARNING
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause dam-
age or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
WARNING
3-19
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Child-protector rear door locks
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors.The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock posi-
tion, the rear door will not open if the
inner door handle is pulled.
To lock the child safety lock, insert a
key (or screwdriver) (1) into the hole
and turn it to the lock position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.
OAD045005N
If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle. The rear door safety
locks should always be used
whenever children are in the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-20
Convenient features of your vehicle
This system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables. The horn will
sound and the hazard warning lights
will blink continuously if any of the
following occurs:
- A door is opened without using the
remote key or smart key.
- The trunk is opened without using
the remote key or smart key.
- The engine hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off
the alarm, unlock the doors with the
remote key or smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automati-
cally sets 30 seconds after you lock
the doors and the trunk. For the sys-
tem to activate, you must lock the
doors and the trunk from outside the
vehicle with the remote key or smart
key or by pressing the button on the
outside of the door handles with the
smart key in your possession.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.
Once the security system is set, open-
ing any door, the trunk, or the hood
without using the remote key or smart
key will cause the alarm to activate.
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the trunk, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the trunk, or the
doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.
Information
• Do not lock the doors until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with
the remote key or smart key, open
the doors by using the mechanical
key and place the ignition switch in
the ON position (for remote key) or
start the engine (for smart key) and
wait for 30 seconds.
• When the system is disarmed but a
door or trunk is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
Information
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm
system will have a label attached to
the vehicle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
i
i
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
OJC040170
3-21
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The Driver Position Memory System
is provided to store and recall the fol-
lowing memory settings with a sim-
ple button operation.
- Driver's seat position
- Outside rearview mirror position
- Instrument panel illumination intensity
Information
• If the battery is disconnected, the
memory settings will be erased.
• If the Driver Position Memory
System does not operate normally,
we recommend that you have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Storing memory positions
1. Move the shift lever into P (for
automatic transmission/dual clutch
transmission) or Neutral (for manu-
al transmission) while the ignition
switch or the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
2. Adjust the driver's seat position,
outside rearview mirror position
and instrument panel illumination
intensity to the desired position.
3. Press the SET button. The system
will beep once and notify you
"Press button to save settings"on
the LCD display.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds. The sys-
tem will beep twice when the mem-
ory has been successfully stored.
5.
"Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will
appear on the LCD display.
i
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OAD045043L
Never attempt to operate the driv-
er position memory system while
the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
WARNING
OLF044403L/OLF044404L
3-22
Convenient features of your vehicle
Recalling memory position
1. Move the shift lever into P (for auto-
matic transmission/dual clutch
transmission) or Neutral (for manu-
al transmission) while the ignition
switch or the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton is in the ON position.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver’s seat posi-
tion, outside rearview mirror and
instrument panel illumination will
automatically adjust to the stored
position (if equipped).
3.
"Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied"
will appear on the LCD display.
Information
• While recalling the "1" memory
position, pressing the SET or 1 but-
ton temporarily stops the adjust-
ment of the recalled memory posi-
tion. Pressing the 2 button recalls
the "2" memory position.
• While recalling the "2" memory
position, pressing the SET or 2 but-
ton temporarily stops the adjust-
ment of the recalled memory posi-
tion. Pressing the 1 button recalls
the "1" memory position.
• While recalling the stored positions,
pressing one of the control buttons
for the driver's seat, outside
rearview mirror, or instrument
panel illumination will cause the
movement of that component to stop
and move in the direction that the
control button is pressed.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The system will move the driver's
seat automatically as follows:
The shift lever is in P or N (for auto-
matic transmission/dual clutch trans-
mission) or Neutral (for manual trans-
mission).
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the ignition key is
removed.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the ignition key is inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the Engine Start/Stop
button is changed to the OFF
position.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the Engine Start/Stop
button is changed to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate the
Easy Access Function from the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
i
OLF044401L/OLF044402L
3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering (EPS)
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle. If the engine is off or if
the power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Also, the steering effort becomes
heavier as the vehicle’s speed
increases and becomes lighter as
the vehicle’s speed decreases for
better control of the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normal-
ly, the warning light ( ) will illu-
minate on the instrument cluster.
The steering wheel may become
difficult to control or operate. Take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible.
Information
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high
immediately after placing the igni-
tion switch or the Engine Start/Stop
button in the ON position.
This happens as the system per-
forms the EPS system diagnostics.
When the diagnostics is completed,
the steering wheel will return to its
normal condition.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
placed to the ON or LOCK/OFF
position (Without Smart key system).
A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON or OFF position.
(With Smart key system)
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driv-
ing speed.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnormal
noise may occur. If temperature
rises, the noise will disappear. This
is a normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary, if
you turn the steering wheel all the
way to the left or right continuously,
the steering wheel effort increases.
This is not a system malfunction. As
time passes, the steering wheel
effort will return to its normal con-
dition.
i
NOTICE
3-24
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tilt steering / Telescope steering
Information
After adjustment, sometimes the lock-
release lever may not lock the steering
wheel.
It is not a malfunction. This occurs
when two gears are not engaged cor-
rectly. In this case, adjust the steering
wheel again and then lock the steering
wheel.
Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on
the steering wheel column and adjust
the steering wheel angle (2) and posi-
tion (3, if equipped). Move the steer-
ing wheel, so it points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Make sure you can see the instrument
panel warning lights and gauges.
After adjusting, pull up the lock-
release lever (1) to lock the steering
wheel in place. Push the steering
wheel both up and down to be cer-
tain it is locked in position. Always
adjust the position of the steering
wheel before driving.
i
Never adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control and cause
severe personal injury, death or
accidents.
WARNING
OAD045006
OAD045006R
■ Right-hand drive
■ Left-hand drive
3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is running,
press the heated steering wheel but-
ton to warm the steering wheel. The
indicator on the button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button again. The indicator
on the button will turn off.
Information
The heated steering wheel will turn off
automatically approximately 30 min-
utes after the heated steering wheel is
turned on.
When the engine is turned off during
the engine and the heated steering
wheel is on, the timer function of heat-
ed steering wheel will be reset.
To reuse heated steering wheel, press
button again.
Do not install any cover or acces-
sory on the steering wheel. This
cover or accessory could cause
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
OAD045008
OAD045007
3-26
Convenient features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Before you start driving, adjust the
rearview mirror to the center on the
view through the rear window.
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
NOTICE
Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo
area, or behind the rear head-
rests which could interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.
WARNING
NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
OAD045009
Day
Night
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automati-
cally controls the glare from the head-
lamp of the car behind you in night-
time or low light driving conditions.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror. The sensor detects the light
level around the vehicle, and auto-
matically adjusts to control the head-
lamp glare from vehicles behind you.
Whenever the shift lever is placed in
R (Reverse), the mirror will automat-
ically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
To operate the electric rearview
mirror:
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion off. The mirror indicator light
will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button is in
the ON position.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors.
The mirror can be adjusted remotely
with the remote switch.
The mirror heads can be folded to
prevent damage during an automatic
car wash or when passing through a
narrow street.
OAD045010
OAD045014
I
I
n
n
d
d
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
o
o
r
r
3-28
Convenient features of your vehicle
Adjusting the rearview mirrors:
Move the lever (1) to the L (Left) or R
(Right) to select the rearview mirror
you would like to adjust.
Use the mirror adjustment control to
position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
• The right outside rearview mir-
ror is convex. In some coun-
tries, the left outside rearview
mirror is also convex. Objects
seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview
mirror or turn your head and
look to determine the actual
distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while driving.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
• Do not scrape ice off the mir-
ror face; this may damage the
surface of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with
ice, do not adjust the mirror
by force. Use an approved
spray de-icer (not radiator
antifreeze) spray, or a sponge
or soft cloth with very warm
water, or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice
to melt.
CAUTION
OAD045015
OAD045015R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
After adjustment, move the lever (1)
to the middle to prevent inadvertent
adjustment.
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch
is pressed. Do not press the
switch longer than necessary,
the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand or
the motor may be damaged.
Folding the outside rearview
mirror
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Electric type (if equipped)
Left : The mirror will unfold.
Right : The mirror will fold.
NOTICE
OAD045016
OAD045017
OAD045017R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-30
Convenient features of your vehicle
Center (AUTO) :
The mirror will fold or unfold auto-
matically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the transmitter.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the button on the outside door
handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. (if equipped)
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. However, to prevent unnec-
essary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than
necessary while the engine is not
running.
Do not fold the electric type out-
side rearview mirror by hand. It
could cause motor failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power windows (if equipped)
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch
* : if equipped
WINDOWS
OAD045020
■ Left-hand drive
3-32
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch
* : if equipped
OAD045020R
■ Right-hand drive
3-33
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to be able to raise or lower
the windows. Each door has a Power
Window switch to control that door's
window. The driver has a Power
Window Lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows will operate for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or OFF position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the Power
Windows cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear win-
dows down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demon-
strate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower both
front windows approximately one
inch. If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly close
the sunroof.
Window opening and closing
To open:
Press the window switch down to the
first detent position (5). Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop.
To close:
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the win-
dow switch when you want the win-
dow to stop.
i
To avoid serious injury or death,
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows
while driving.
WARNING
OAD045038
3-34
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is
in operation, pull up or press down
and release the switch.
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
To reset the power windows
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, it is recom-
mended that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Automatic reversal (if equipped)
If a window senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
stop and lower approximately 30 cm
(12 inches) to allow the object to be
cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 sec-
onds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal fea-
ture, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.
OLF044032
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the “Auto Up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch to
the second detent.
Power window lock switch
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers' doors by pressing the power
window lock switch.
When the power window lock switch
is pressed:
• The driver's master control can only
operate the driver’s power window.
• The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
• The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passengers'
power window.
i
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects less than 4 mm (0.16
inch) in diameter caught between
the window glass and the upper
window channel may not be
detected by the automatic reverse
window and the window will not
stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
OAD045021
OAD045021R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional win-
dow operation by a child.
WARNING
3-36
Convenient features of your vehicle
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposite directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
NOTICE
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
• NEVER leave any child unat-
tended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inad-
vertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion (pressed). Serious injury
can result from unintentional
window operation by the child.
• Do not extend your head,
arms or body outside the win-
dows while driving.
WARNING
3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control
switch located on the overhead con-
sole.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Sunroof opening and closing
To open:
Press the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
To close:
Press the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
Sliding the sunroof
Pressing the sunroof control lever
backward or forward momentarily to
the second detent position completely
opens or closes the sunroof even
when the switch is released. To stop
the sunroof at the desired position
while the sunroof is in operation, press
the sunroof control lever backward or
forward and release the switch.
Information
To reduce wind noise while driving, it
is recommended that you drive with
the sunroof slightly closed (stop the
sunroof about 5 cm before the maxi-
mum slide open position).
To prevent damage to the sunroof
and the motor, do not continue to
press the sunroof control lever
after the sunroof is in the fully
open, closed or tilt position(s).
NOTICE
i
OAD045022
OAD045023
3-38
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
If the sunroof senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction then stop to allow
the object to be cleared.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a small obstacle is between
the sliding glass and the sunroof
sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
Tilt the sunroof open:
Push the sunroof control lever
upward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.
To close the sunroof:
Press the sunroof lever forward until
the sunroof moves to the desired
position.
OLFC044035CN OAD045024
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or other objects are
safely out of the way before
closing the sunroof to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent.
• To avoid serious injury or
death, do not extend your
head, arms or body outside
the sunroof while driving.
WARNING
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sun-
roof and roof panel, which can
make a noise.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
motor could be damaged. In
cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly.
Information
After washing the vehicle or after a
rain, be sure to wipe off the water on
the sunroof before operating the sun-
roof.
Sunshade
The sunshade will open automatical-
ly with the sunroof when the glass
panel moves. If you want it closed,
move the sunshade manually.
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
OAD045037
3-40
Convenient features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol-
lowings)
- Battery is discharged or disconnect-
ed or the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of the
sunroof does not normally operate
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position or start the engine. It is rec-
ommended to reset the sunroof
while the engine is running.
2. Push the control lever forward. The
sunroof will close completely or tilt
depending on the condition of the
sunroof.
3. Release the control lever until the
sunroof does not move.
4. Push the control lever forward
about 10 seconds.
- When the sunroof is in the close
position :
The glass will tilt and slightly move
up and down.
- When the sunroof is in the tilt posi-
tion:
The glass will slightly move up
and down.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, try again from step 2.
5. Within 3 seconds, push the control
lever forward until the sunroof
operates as follows:
Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide
Close.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, try again from step 2.
6. Release the sunroof control lever
after all operation has completed.
(The sunroof system has been
reset.)
Information
• If the sunroof does not reset when
the vehicle battery is disconnected
or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, the sunroof may not operate
normally.
• For more detailed information, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Hood
Opening the hood
1. Park the vehicle and set the park-
ing brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the second-
ary latch up (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
4. Pull out the support rod.
5. Hold the hood opened with the
support rod (3).
EXTERIOR FEATURES
OAD045026 OAD045039L
OAD045025
OAD045025R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-42
Convenient features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood halfway and let it
drop. Make sure that it locks into
place.
• Before closing the hood,
ensure all obstructions are
removed from around hood
opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed,
which might result in an acci-
dent, and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
WARNING
Support rod
• Grasp the support rod in the
area wrapped in rubber. The
rubber will help prevent you
from being burned by hot
metal when the engine is hot.
• The support rod must be
inserted completely into the
hole provided whenever you
inspect the engine compart-
ment. This will prevent the
hood from falling and possi-
bly injuring you.
WARNING
3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Trunk
Opening the trunk
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park, for automatic transmission)
or first gear or R (Reverse, for
manual transmission) and set the
parking brake.
2. Then do one of the following :
- Press the Remote key or Smart
Key Trunk Unlock button for more
than one second.
- Press the button on the trunk
itself with the Smart Key in your
possession.
- Use the mechanical key.
- Use the trunk release lever.
3. Lift the trunk lid up.
Closing the trunk
Lower the trunk lid and press down
until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid
is securely fastened, always check
by trying to pull it up again.
Always keep the trunk lid com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is
in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases con-
taining carbon monoxide (CO)
may enter the vehicle and seri-
ous illness or death may result.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
Power Trunk. Wait until the trunk
is open fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo from the vehicle.
WARNING
OAD045027L
■ Outside
OAD045028
OAD045028R
■ Inside
• Left-hand drive
• Right-hand drive
3-44
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
To prevent damage to the trunk lift
cylinders and the attached hardware,
always close the trunk before driving.
In cold and wet climates, trunk
lock and trunk mechanisms may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
Smart trunk (if equipped)
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the trunk can be opened using
the Smart Trunk system.
NOTICE
i
• NEVER allow anyone to occu-
py the trunk of the vehicle at
any time. If the trunk is par-
tially or totally latched and the
person is unable to get out,
serious injury or death could
occur due to lack of ventila-
tion, exhaust fumes and rapid
heat build-up, or because of
exposure to cold weather con-
ditions. The trunk is also a
highly dangerous location in
the event of a crash because it
is not a protected occupant
space but is a part of the vehi-
cle’s crush zone.
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and keys should be
kept out of the reach of chil-
dren. Parents should teach
their children about the dan-
gers of playing in trunks.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only.
WARNING
OAD045030
3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
How to use the Smart Trunk
The trunk can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
Information
• The Smart Trunk does not operate
when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is continu-
ously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and 1.5 m from
the front door handles. (for vehi-
cles equipped with Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Trunk, go to
User Settings Mode and select
Smart Trunk on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (50 ~100 cm behind the vehi-
cle) carrying a smart key, the hazard
warning lights will blink and chime
will sound for about 3 seconds to
alert you the smart key has been
detected and the trunk will open.
Information
Do not approach the detecting area if
you do not want the trunk to open. If
you have unintentionally entered the
detecting area and the hazard warn-
ing lights and chime starts to operate,
leave the detecting area with the
smart key. The trunk will stay closed.
i
i
OAD045031
3-46
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the trunk will slowly open.
How to deactivate the Smart
Trunk function using the smart
key
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Trunk open
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Trunk function
for emergency situations.
OAD045032
• Make sure you close the trunk
before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
trunk.
• Make sure objects in the trunk
do not come out when open-
ing the trunk on a slope. It
may cause serious injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the
Smart Trunk when washing
your vehicle. Otherwise, the
trunk may open inadvertently.
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children
may inadvertently open the
Smart Trunk while playing
around the rear area of the
vehicle.
WARNING
OBA043222IN
3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• If you press the door unlock button
(2), the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated temporarily. But, if
you do not open any door for 30 sec-
onds, the smart trunk function will
be activated again.
• If you press the trunk open button
(3) for more than 1 second, the
trunk opens.
• If you press the door lock button (1)
or trunk open button (3) when the
Smart Trunk function is not in the
Detect and Alert stage, the smart
trunk function will not be deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Trunk function by pressing
the smart key button and opened a
door, the smart trunk function can
be activated again by closing and
locking all doors.
Detecting area
• The Smart Trunk operates with a
welcome alert if the smart key is
detected within 50~100 cm from
the trunk.
• The alert stops at once if the smart
key is positioned outside the
detecting area during the Detect
and Alert stage.
Information
• The Smart Trunk function will not
work if any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is
being operated close to your vehi-
cle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the vehi-
cle.
- The vehicle is slantingly parked on
a slope or unpaved road, etc.
ii
OAD045033
3-48
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fuel filler door
Opening the fuel filler door
The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
the fuel filler door opener.
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Push the fuel filler door opener
button.
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
fully open.
4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pres-
sure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.
OAD045034
OAD045034R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
OAD045035
(Continued)
The fuel inlet of your diesel
vehicle cannot be fitted with a
standard gasoline nozzle.
Do not forcefully insert a stan-
dard gasoline nozzle into the
filler inlet of your diesel vehicle.
It may damage your vehicle.
• Some gas stations may still use
standard gasoline nozzles for
diesel refueling. If you find that
a diesel nozzle is narrower than
the fuel filler inlet diameter of
your diesel vehicle, we recom-
mend you to find/visit another
gas station, which is equipped
with standard diesel nozzles.
• Fully insert a standard diesel
nozzle into the filler inlet to
open the breakaway valve. If
the nozzle is not fully inserted
into the filler inlet, it causes
diesel fuels to flow out of the
fuel tank.
• Your diesel vehicle is equipped
with the specially-designed
breakaway valve inside the
filler inlet to prevent accidental
fuel blending with gasoline.
(Continued)
WARNING
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved de-
icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-
freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler door
1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it “clicks” one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
i
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing. You can generate a build-
up of static electricity by touch-
ing, rubbing or sliding against
any item or fabric capable of
producing static electricity.
Static electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors causing a
fire. If you must re-enter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle, away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
3-50
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted sur-
faces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
NOTICE
i
(Continued)
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
(Continued)
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position (for automatic trans-
mission) or first gear or R
(Reverse, for manual trans-
mission), set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact between
your bare hand and the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
(Continued)
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OAD045100L
■
Conventional cluster
The actual cluster in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges"
in this chapter.
3-52
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OAD045101L/OAD045102L
The actual cluster in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges"
in this chapter.
■
Supervision cluster (Type B)
■
Supervision cluster (Type A)
3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Instrument cluster control
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle's parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumina-
tion control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination.
When pressing the illumination con-
trol button, the interior switch illumi-
nation intensity is also adjusted.
• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, a
chime will sound.
Never adjust the instrument clus-
ter while driving.This could result
in loss of control and lead to an
accident that may cause death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
WARNING
OAD045108
OAD045115
■ Conventional cluster
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
OTL045150L/OTL045151L
3-54
Convenient features of your vehicle
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or
miles per hour (MPH).
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
"130 or H (Hot)" position, it indi-
cates overheating that may dam-
age the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle
overheats, refer to "If the Engine
Overheats" in chapter 6.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAD045103/OAD045103L
■ MPH, km/h
■ km/h
OAD045106/OAD045106L
OAD045105/OAD045104
■ Diesel engine
■ Gasoline engine
■ Except Europe ■ For Europe
3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
Information
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire
damaging the catalytic converter.
NOTICE
i
Never remove the radiator cap or
reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. The engine coolant is under
pressure and could severe
burns. Wait until the engine is
cool before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
WARNING
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the "0 or E
(Empty)" level.
WARNING
OAD045107/OAD045107L
■ Except Europe ■ For Europe
3-56
Convenient features of your vehicle
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures either in
Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit.
- Temperature range :
-40°C ~ 60°C (-40°F ~ 140°F)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not immediately change
like a general thermometer not to
distract the driver.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by:
- Press the TRIP button for more
than 5 seconds on the steering
wheel.
- User Settings mode in the Cluster :
You can change the temperature
unit in the “Other Features -
Temperature unit” .
- Automatic climate control system :
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds or more.
The temperature unit of the instrument
cluster and climate control system will
change at once.
OAD045116
■ Conventional cluster
OTL045130/OTL045131
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
Warning and indicator lights
Information
Make sure that all warning lights are
OFF after starting the engine. If any
light is still ON, this indicates a situa-
tion that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
OAD045119
■ Conventional cluster
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
OTL045136/OTL045137
3-58
Convenient features of your vehicle
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 2.
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reser-
voir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in
chapter 7). After adding brake
fluid, check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is
found, or if the warning light
remains on, or if the brakes do not
operate properly, do not drive the
vehicle. We recommend you to
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure is
required to stop the vehicle.
3-59
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-60
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
- Electronic
Brake force Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS Warning
Light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, we recommend you have
the vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
We recommend you have the
vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
WARNING
3-61
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to
the emission control systems which
could affect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
- Gasoline Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-
ic converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
- Diesel Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) blinks, some error related to
the injection quantity adjustment
occurs which could result in loss
of engine power, combustion
noise and poor emission.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the engine control sys-
tem inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-62
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7).
If the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light is illumi-
nated, severe damage could
result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be seri-
ous engine damage or malfunc-
tion. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is
low, fill the engine oil to the
proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after the
engine is started, turn the
engine off immediately. In this
case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below "0 or E" can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter (if equipped).
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-63
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Washer Fluid Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the
washer fluid.
Overspeed Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• When you drive the vehicle more
than 120 km/h.
- This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
- The overspeed warning chime
also sounds for approximately 5
seconds.
Master Warning Light
(for supervision
cluster)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction in
operation in any of the following
systems:
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS, if equipped)
- Service reminder
To identify the details of the warn-
ing, look at the LCD display.
120
km/h
3-64
Convenient features of your vehicle
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of the underinflated tire is
displayed on the supervision clus-
ter LCD display).
For more details, refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
This warning light remains ON
after blinking for approximately 60
seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON
and OFF in 3 second intervals:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
For more details, refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
Fuel Filter Warning
Light (for diesel engine)
This warning light illuminates:
• When water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter.
In this case, remove the water from
the fuel filter.
For more details, refer to “Fuel
Filter” in chapter 7.
• When the Fuel Filter Warning
Light illuminates, engine power
(vehicle speed & idle speed) may
decrease.
• If you keep driving with the warn-
ing light on, engine parts (injec-
tor, common rail, high pressure
fuel pump) may be damaged. If
this occurs, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er as soon as possible.
NOTICE
Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Exhaust System (DPF)
Warning Light (for
diesel engine)
This warning light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction with
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) sys-
tem.
• When this warning light illumi-
nates, it may turn off after driving
the vehicle:
- at more than 60 km/h (37 mph), or
- at more than 2nd gear with 1500
~ 2000 engine rpm for a certain
time (for about 25 minutes).
If this warning light blinks in spite of
the procedure (at this time LCD
warning message will be displayed),
we recommend that you have the
DPF system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
If you continue to drive with the
DPF warning light blinking for a
long time, the DPF system can be
damaged and fuel consumption
can worsen.
Glow Indicator Light
(for diesel engine)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the engine is being preheat-
ed with the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button in the ON
position.
- The engine can be started after
the glow indicator light goes off.
- The illumination time varies with
the engine coolant temperature,
air temperature, and battery con-
dition.
If the indicator light remains on or
blinks after the engine has warmed
up or while driving, there may a mal-
function with the engine preheating
system.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is com-
pleted, set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the
LOCK or OFF position for 10 seconds
and then to the ON position in order
to preheat the engine again.
i
NOTICE
3-66
Convenient features of your vehicle
Door Ajar Warning Light
(for conventional
cluster)
This warning light illuminates:
• When a door is not closed securely.
Trunk Open Warning
Light (for conventional
cluster)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the trunk is not closed
securely.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)”in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately
3 seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)”in chapter 5.
3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
AUTO STOP Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the engine enters the Idle
Stop mode of the ISG (Idle Stop and
Go) system.
• When the automatic starting occurs,
the AUTO STOP indicator on the
cluster will blink for 5 seconds.
For more details, refer to the “ISG
(Idle Stop and Go) system” in chap-
ter 5.
Information
When the engine automatically starts
by the ISG system, some warning
lights(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or
Parking brake warning light) may
turn on for a few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system
has malfunctioned.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (without smart
key) (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in the key with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (with smart key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for
up to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC or ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you cannot start the
engine.
i
3-68
Convenient features of your vehicle
This indicator light illuminates for
2 seconds and goes off:
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and the Engine Start/Stop button is
ON., but the vehicle cannot detect
the smart key.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery voltage of the
smart key is low.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the
Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key. (For more details,
refer to "Starting the Engine"
in chapter 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you operate the turn signal
indicator light.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system.
- The turn signal indicator light illumi-
nates but does not blink
- The turn signal indicator light blinks
rapidly
- The turn signal indicator light does
not illuminate at all
If either of these conditions occur, we
recommend you to have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Low Beam Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Light ON Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Rear Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the rear fog lights are on.
Exterior Light Warning
Light (if equipped)
(for conventional
cluster)
This warning light illuminates:
• When one of the exterior bulbs
(headlamp, tail lamp, fog lamp, etc.)
is not operating properly. One of the
bulbs may need to be replaced.
Information
Make sure to replace the burned out
bulb with a new one of the same
wattage rating.
i
3-70
Convenient features of your vehicle
Cruise Indicator Light
(for conventional
cluster, if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (for conventional
cluster, if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is
set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates
• When you select "SPORT" mode
as drive mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
in chapter 5.
ECO Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select “ECO” mode as
drive mode.
For more details, refer to “Drive
Mode Integrated Control System”
in chapter 5.
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LCD display messages
Shift to "P" position
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transmission/dual clutch
transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton once more, it will turn to the ON
position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the battery of the smart key is dis-
charged while changing the Engine
Start/Stop button while changing to
the OFF position.
Press start button while turning
wheel (for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the steering wheel does not unlock
normally when the Engine Start/Stop
button is pressed.
You should press you should press the
Engine Start/Stop button while turning
the steering wheel right and left.
OTL045141L
OTL045144L
OTL045300L
■ Supervision cluster
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
3-72
Convenient features of your vehicle
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the steering wheel does not lock
while the Engine Start/Stop button
changes to the OFF position.
Check steering wheel lock
system (for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally while the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton changes to the OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button changes
to the ACC position twice by pressing
the button repeatedly without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
You can start the vehicle by depressing
the brake pedal.
OTL045301L OTL045302L
OTL045142L
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
■ Supervision cluster
3-73
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Press clutch pedal to start
engine (for smart key system
and manual transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing
the clutch pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal to start the
engine.
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine Start/Stop
button.
It means that you always have the
smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not detected when you
press the Engine Start/Stop button.
OTL045139LOTL045138L
OTL045143L
■ Supervision cluster
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
3-74
Convenient features of your vehicle
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
This message is displayed if you
were unable to start the vehicle when
the Engine Start/Stop button was
pressed.
If this occurs, attempt to start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button again.
If the warning message appears
each time you press the Engine
Start/Stop button, we recommend
you to have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Press “START” button with key
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton while the warning message “Key
not detected” is displayed.
At this time, the immobilizer indicator
light blinks.
Check "BRAKE SWITCH" fuse
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transmission/dual clutch
transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
You need to replace the fuse with a
new one before starting the engine.
If that is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in the
ACC position.
OTL045140L
OTL045147L
OTL045145L
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
■ Supervision cluster
3-75
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transmission/dual clutch
transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
you try to start the engine with the
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.
Information
You can start the engine with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position. But,
for your safety, we recommend that
you start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
Door, Hood, Trunk Open
This warning message is displayed
indicating which door, or the hood, or
the trunk is open.
If the door/trunk open warning mes-
sage is blocked with another warning
message, an icon will appear on the
top of the LCD display.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
This warning is displayed if you turn
off the engine when the sunroof is
open.
i
OAD045160/OAD045137
OTL045146L
■ Supervision cluster
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OAD045135/OAD045136
■ Supervision cluster
3-76
Convenient features of your vehicle
Heated Steering Wheel Off
(if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
you turn off the heated steering wheel.
For more details, refer to “Heated
Steering Wheel” in this chapter.
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy.
When the temperature on the out-
side temperature gauge is approxi-
mately below 4°C (40°F), the Icy
Road Warning Light and Outside
Temperature Gauge blinks 10 times,
and then illuminates. Also, the warn-
ing chime sounds 1 time.
Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-
den braking or sharp turning, etc.
i
OTL045167L
■ Supervision cluster
OAD045186N
■ Conventional cluster
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
OAD055094L/OAD055095L
3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Transmission shift indicator
Automatic Transmission Shift
Indicator (if equipped)
This indicator displays which shift
lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Dual Clutch Transmission Shift
Indicator (if equipped)
This indicator displays which shift
lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : D1, D2, D3, D4, D5,
D6, D7
Manual Transmission Shift
Indicator (if equipped)
This indicator informs which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
• Shifting up :
▲
2,
▲
3,
▲
4,
▲
5,
▲
6
• Shifting down :
▼
1,
▼
2,
▼
3,
▼
4,
▼
5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or
1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (current-
ly the shift lever is in the 4th,
5th, or 6th gear).
When the system is not working prop-
erly, the indicator is not displayed.
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OAD045131/OAD045132
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
OAD045117OTLE045134
■ Conventional cluster
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
OAD045185N/OTL045132
3-78
Convenient features of your vehicle
Shift Indicator Pop-up (if equipped)
The pop-up that indicates the current
gear position is displayed in the clus-
ter for about 2 seconds when shifting
into other positions (P/R/N/D).
CRUISE/SET indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator is displayed when the
cruise control system is enabled and
the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
Low Pressure (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
the tire pressure is low. The corre-
sponding tire on the vehicle will be
illuminated.
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
OTL045134/OTL045135
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
OAD055096L/OAD055097L
OAD045121N
■ Supervision cluster
■ Supervision cluster
3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
This warning message is displayed if
the fuse switch located on the fuse
box under the steering wheel is OFF.
You should turn the fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses”
in chapter 7.
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
you start the engine when the steer-
ing wheel is turned to more than 90
degrees to the left or right.
In order to align the steering wheel,
turn the wheel in the direction shown
while the engine is running to
straighten the steering wheel.
Steering wheel aligning is com-
pleted (if equipped)
If the steering wheel aligning is com-
pleted after "Align steering wheel"
warning message is displayed, this
message is displayed for 2 seconds.
OTL045156L/OTL045157L
■ Supervision cluster
OAD045144/OTL045155L
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OTL045158L
■ Supervision cluster
3-80
Convenient features of your vehicle
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed
in the service reminder mode if the
washer fluid level in the reservoir is
nearly empty.
Have the washer fluid reservoir
refilled.
Low Fuel
This warning message is displayed if
the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.
When this message is displayed, the
low fuel level warning light in the
cluster will come on.
It is recommended to look for the
nearest fueling station and refuel as
soon as possible.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Engine has overheated
This warning message is displayed
when the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
OTL045160LOTL045159L
■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OAD045125L/OAD045126L
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Check headlight (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
the headlamps are not operating
properly. The headlamp bulb may
need to be replaced.
Information
Make sure to replace the burned out
bulb with a new one of the same
wattage rating.
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
warning (for diesel engine)
This warning message is displayed if
the DPF system has a malfunction.
At this time, DPF warning light also
blinks.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the DPF system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Warning
Lights" in this chapter.
i
OAD045141L/OAD045142L
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
OTL045165L
■ Supervision cluster
3-82
Convenient features of your vehicle
LCD display control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) ▲, ▼ : MOVE switch for chang-
ing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
LCD modes
LCD DISPLAY (FOR SUPERVISION CLUSTER)
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like
the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer"
in this chapter.
Tu r n By Tu r n
(TBT)
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navi-
gation.
A/V
(If equipped)
This mode displays the state of the A/V
system.
Information
This mode displays the service interval
(mileage or days) and warning messages
related to the Blind Spot Detection system,
etc.
User Settings
In this mode, you can change settings of
the doors, lamps, etc.
OAD045109L
■ Type A
■ Type B
or or
3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Edit settings after engaging
parking brake / Edit settings
after shifting to P
This warning message appears if
you try to adjust the User Settings
while driving.
- Automatic transmission / dual
clutch transmission
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle,
applying the parking brake and mov-
ing the shift lever to P (Park).
- Manual transmission
For your safety, change the User
Settings after engaging the parking
brake.
Quick guide (Help, if equipped)
This mode provides quick guides for
the systems in the User Settings
mode.
Select an item, press and hold the
OK button.
For more details about each sys-
tem, refer to this Owner’s Manual.
Trip computer mode
The trip computer mode displays
information related to vehicle driving
parameters including fuel economy,
trip meter information and vehicle
speed.
For more details, refer to "Trip
Computer" in this chapter.
OAD045166L/OAD045165L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAD045161L/OAD045162L
■ Type A ■ Type B
3-84
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
A/V mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Information mode
This mode displays the service inter-
val (mileage and days).
Service interval
Service in
It calculates and displays the mainte-
nance schedule (mileage or days),
as set in the system.
When the set mileages or days
passed, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
ignition switch is turned ON.
OTL045173/OTL045174
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTL045177/OTL045178
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTL045181L/OTL045182L
■ Type A ■ Type B
3-85
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Service required
If you exceed the specified service
interval, a message indicating,
"Service required" will be displayed
each time you turn ON the vehicle.
To reset the service interval in
mileages or days that you initially
set:
- Activate the reset mode by press-
ing the OK button for more than 5
second, then press the OK button
again for more than 1 second (for
Europe).
- Press the OK button for more than
1 second (except Europe).
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service in OFF" message is dis-
played on the LCD display.
Information
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
Warning message
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed in the
information mode for several seconds.
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS, if equipped)
- Service reminder
i
OTL045298L/OTL045299L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTL045296L/OTL045297L
■ Type A ■ Type B
3-86
Convenient features of your vehicle
User settings mode
In this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.
Driving Assist (if equipped)
Items Explanation
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the rear cross traffic alert function will be activated.
For more details, refer to "Blind Spot Detection System" in chapter 5.
Door
Items Explanation
Auto Lock
• Disable : The automatic door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h
(9.3mph).
• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shift-
ed from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Unlock
• Disable : The automatic door unlock operation will be canceled.
• On key out : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the
ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
• Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the driver's door is unlocked.
• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shift-
ed to the P (Park) position.
(Continued)
3-87
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Items Explanation
Horn Feedback
If this item is checked, the horn feedback operation will be activated.
After locking the door by pressing the lock button on the remote key, if you press the lock button
again within 4 seconds, the warning sound will operate once to indicate that all doors are locked.
Smart Trunk
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the smart trunk function will be activated.
For more details, refer to "Smart Trunk" in this chapter.
(Continued)
Light
Items Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
For more details, refer to "Light" in this chapter.
Head Lamp Delay • If this item is checked, the head lamp delay function will be activated.
Welcome light
(if equipped)
• If this item is checked, the welcome light function will be activated.
3-88
Convenient features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Seat Easy Access
• None: The seat easy access function is deactivated.
• Normal/Extended:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal)
or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
For more information, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in this chapter.
Steering Position
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the message “Align Steering Wheel” will be displayed on the LCD if the steer-
ing wheel has been turned to the left or right over 90 degrees when the engine is turned ON.
Gear Position Pop-up
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the gear position will be displayed when you move the shift lever.
Convenience
Sound
Items Explanation
Cluster Voice Guidance
Volume
• To adjust the cluster voice guidance volume (Level 0~3)
Park Assist System Vol.
(if equipped)
• To adjust the Park Assist System volume. (Level 1~3)
For more details, refer to "Parking Assist System" in this chapter.
Blind Spot Detection Sound
(if equipped)
• If this item is checked, the blind spot detection sound will be activated.
For more details, refer to "Blind Spot Detection System" in chapter 5.
Welcome sound
(if equipped)
• If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated.
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Other features
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Auto Reset
• Off : The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• After Ignition : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when driving.
• After Refueling : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (Km/L, L/100)
Temperature Unit Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit
(if equipped)
Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, bar)
Language Choose the language.
Items Explanation
Service Interval
(Except Europe)
In this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(days)
• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and days).
For more details, refer to "Information Mode" in this chapter.
Service interval
3-90
Convenient features of your vehicle
Conventional cluster
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in the
trip computer (for example Average
Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, press the
TRIP button on the steering wheel.
i
TRIP COMPUTER
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Service Information
Digital Speed ON/OFF
OAD045450N
3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Fuel economy
Distance To Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range:
1 ~ 9999 km or 1 ~ 9999 mi.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will
display "----" as distance to empty.
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the distance to empty func-
tion may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 3 liters (1
gallon) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range:
0.0 ~ 99.9 L/100km, km/L or MPG
• To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the RESET button
on the steering wheel for more than
1 second when the average fuel
economy is displayed.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instanta-
neous fuel economy while driving
when the vehicle speed is greater
than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
- Fuel economy range:
0~30 L/100km, km/L or 0~50 MPG
i
OAD045151
3-92
Convenient features of your vehicle
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range:
0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or mi.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range:
0 ~ 240 km/h or 0 ~ 160 MPH
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the RESET button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
Information
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 300 meters (0.19 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or the Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• The average vehicle speed will con-
tinue to be calculated and will start
to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traf-
fic or stopped at a stop light.)
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm):
00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
RESET button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second when
the elapsed time is displayed.
Information
The elapsed time will continue to be
counted while the engine is still run-
ning (for example, when the vehicle is
in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)
i
i
OAD045152
3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Service information
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 km (900 miles) or 30
days, the service symbol ( ) will
blink for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button to the ON position.
Information
To change or deactivate the service
interval, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you exceed the specified service
interval, the service symbol ( )
will blink each time you turn ON the
vehicle.
To reset the service interval, press
the RESET button for more than 5
seconds and then when the miles
and days blink press the RESET but-
ton for more than 1 second.
If the service interval is not set, the
service symbol ( ) will not be dis-
played.
Digital speedometer
This message shows the speed of
the vehicle (in mph, km/h).
To turn the digital speedometer ON
and OFF press the RESET button for
more than 1 second when the digital
speedometer is displayed.
i
OAD045182N
OAD045177N/OAD045176NOAD045179N
3-94
Convenient features of your vehicle
Supervision cluster
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in the
trip computer (for example Average
Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, toggle the
“▲, ▼” switch on the steering wheel.
i
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Digital Speedometer
Auto Stop Time
OAD045449
3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Fuel economy
Distance To Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range:
1 ~ 9999 km or 1 ~ 9999 mi.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will
display "----" as distance to empty.
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the distance to empty func-
tion may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 3 liters (1
gallon) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range:
0.0 ~ 99.9 L/100km, km/L or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the [OK] button on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average fuel econo-
my is displayed.
i
OAD045170L/OAD045167L
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-96
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic reset
To automatically reset the average fuel
economy after refueling, select the
"Auto Reset" mode in User Settings
menu on the LCD display (Refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter).
In "Auto Reset" mode, the average fuel
economy will be reset to zero (----),
when driving speed exceeds 1 km/h,
after adding 3~6 liters (1~2 gallon) of
fuels or more.
Information
The vehicle must be driven for a min-
imum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since
the last ignition key cycle before the
average fuel economy will be recalcu-
lated.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instanta-
neous fuel economy while driving
when the vehicle speed is greater
than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
- Fuel economy range:
0~30 L/100km, km/L or 0~50 MPG
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range:
0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or mi.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
[OK] button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
i
OAD045166L/OAD045165L
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range:
0~240 km/h or 0~160 MPH
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the [OK] button on the steer-
ing wheel for more than 1 second
when the average vehicle speed is
displayed.
Information
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 300 meters (0.19 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or the Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• The average vehicle speed will con-
tinue to be calculated and will start
to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traf-
fic or stopped at a stop light.)
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm):
00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
[OK] button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
Information
The elapsed time will continue to be
counted while the engine is still run-
ning (for example, when the vehicle is
in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)
Auto stop time (if equipped)
This mode displays the elapsed time of
Auto stop for "Idle stop and go system".
For more details, refer to the "Idle
stop and go system" in chapter 5.
i
i
OTL045191L/OAD045175N
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-98
Convenient features of your vehicle
Digital speedometer
This message shows the speed of
the vehicle (km/h, MPH).
Driving Info display
At the end of each driving cycle, the
Driving Info message is displayed.
This display shows the trip distance
(1), the average fuel economy (2),
and the remaining distance to empty
(3).
This information is displayed for a few
seconds when you turn off the igni-
tion, and then goes off automatically.
The information is calculated for each
ignition cycle.
If the estimated remaining vehicle
range is below 1 km (1 mi.), the dis-
tance to empty will display as "----"
and a "Low Fuel" warning message
(4) will be displayed.
Information
If sunroof open warning is displayed
in the cluster, the Driving Info mes-
sage will not be displayed.
i
OAD045164L/OAD045163L
■ Type B■ Type A
OTL045193/OTL045194
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Exterior lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF (O) position
(2) AUTO light position (if equipped)
(3) Parking lamp position
(4) Headlamp position
AUTO light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO
position, the parking lamp and head-
lamp will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
LIGHT
OAD045436L
OAD045436R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
OTL045251L
OTL045251R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-100
Convenient features of your vehicle
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tun-
nels and parking facilities.
• Do not cover or spill anything on
the sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleanser
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor oper-
ation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coat-
ing on the front windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work
properly.
Parking lamp position ( )
The parking lamp, license plate lamp
and instrument panel lamp are turned
ON.
Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, parking lamp, license
plate lamp and instrument panel
lamp are turned ON.
Information
The ignition switch button must be in
the ON position to turn on the head-
lamp.
i
NOTICE
OTL045253L
OTL045253R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
OTL045252L
OTL045252R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.
To flash the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver's vision.
WARNING
OTL045255L
OTL045255R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
OTL045254L
OTL045254R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-102
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
To signal a turn, push down on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
turn in position (A). To signal a lane
change, move the turn signal lever
slightly and hold it in position (B).
The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released or when the turn
is completed.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch turn signal function
To activate an one-touch turn signal
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times.
You can activate/deactivate the One
Touch Turn Signal function or choose
the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7)
from the User Settings Mode on the
LCD display. For more details, refer
to "LCD Display" in this chapter.
Front fog lamp (if equipped)
Fog lamps are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Use
the switch next to the headlamp switch
to turn the fog lamps ON and OFF.
OTL045257L
OTL045257R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
OTL045258L
OTL045258R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
1. Turn on the parking lamp.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog lamp position.
3. To turn off the front fog lamp, turn
the light switch to the front fog
lamp position again or turn off the
parking lamp.
When in operation, the fog lamps
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lamps when visibility is poor.
Rear fog lamp (if equipped)
Vehicle with front fog lamp
To turn on the rear fog lamp:
Position the light switch in the park-
ing lamp position, turn the light
switch to the front fog lamp position,
and then turn the lamp switch (1) to
the rear fog lamp position.
Vehicle without front fog lamp
To turn on the rear fog lamp:
Position the light switch in the head-
lamp position, and then turn the light
switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.
NOTICE
OTL045278L
OTL045278R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
OTLE045285
OTL045278AU
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-104
Convenient features of your vehicle
To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one
of the following:
• Turn off the headlamp switch.
• Turn the light switch to the rear fog
lamp position again.
• When the light switch is in the
parking lamp position, if you turn
off the front fog lamp, the rear fog
lamp will also turn off.
Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lamp when the
driver turns the engine off and opens
the driver-side door.
With this feature, the parking lamps
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the engine is turned off, perform
the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
If you place the ignition switch in to
the ACC or OFF position with the
headlamps ON, the headlamps
(and/or parking lamps) remain on for
about 5 minutes. However, with the
engine off if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlamps
(and/or parking lamps) are turned off
after 15 seconds.
The headlamps (and/or parking
lamps) can be turned off by pressing
the lock button on the smart key
twice or turning the light switch to the
OFF or AUTO position. However, if
you turn the light switch to the AUTO
position when it is dark outside, the
headlamps will not be turned off.
You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings Mode on the LCD dis-
play. For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.
3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except dri-
ver's door), the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the
headlamp delay function does not
turn off automatically. Therefore, It
causes the battery to be dis-
charged. In this case, make sure to
turn off the lamp before getting out
of the vehicle.
Daytime running light (DRL)
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL system will turn the dedi-
cated lamp OFF when:
1. The headlights or front fog lights
are in the ON position.
2. The engine is turned off.
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the pas-
sengers and loading weight in the
luggage area, turn the beam leveling
switch.
NOTICE
OAD045433
OAD045433R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
3-106
Convenient features of your vehicle
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight
beam level. Always keep the head-
light beam at the proper leveling
position, or headlights may dazzle
other road users.
Listed below are the examples of
proper switch settings. For loading
conditions other than those listed
below, adjust the switch position so
that the beam level may be the near-
est as the condition obtained accord-
ing to the list.
Welcome system (if equipped)
Welcome light (if equipped)
Door handle lamp (if equipped)
When all the doors (and trunk) are
closed and locked, the door handle
lamp will come on for about 15 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
• When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Headlamp and Parking lamp
When the headlamp (lamp switch in
the headlamp or AUTO position) is on
and all doors (and trunk) are locked
and closed, the parking lamp and
headlamp will come on for 15 seconds
if/or any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the parking lamp and
headlamp will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the
Welcome Light from the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
Loading condition
Switch
position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers (including driver) 1
Full passengers (including driver)
+ Maximum permissible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permissible
loading
3
OAD045434L
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are closed and locked, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the room lamp will
turn off immediately.
Interior lights
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is turned off or the battery will dis-
charge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
The interior lamps will automatically
go off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off and the
doors closed. If a door is opened, the
lamp will go off 40 minutes after the
engine is turned off. If the doors are
locked by the smart key and the vehi-
cle enters the armed stage of the
theft alarm system, the lamps will go
off five seconds later.
NOTICE
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined
backward according to passen-
ger's posture, or the headlight
beam is irradiated to the high or
low position, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
WARNING
3-108
Convenient features of your vehicle
Front lamps
(1) Front Map Lamp
(2) Front Door Lamp
(3) Front Room Lamp
Front Map Lamp :
Press either of these lens to turn the
map lamp on or off. This light pro-
duces a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night or as a
personal lamp for the driver and the
front passenger.
Front Door Lamp ( ):
The front or rear room lamps come on
when the front or rear doors are
opened if the engine is running or not.
When doors are unlocked by the
remote key or smart key, the front and
rear lamps come on for approximate-
ly 30 seconds as long as any door is
not opened. The front and rear room
lamps go out gradually after approxi-
mately 30 seconds if the door is
closed. However, if the ignition switch
is in the ON position or all doors are
locked, the front and rear lamps will
turn off. If a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC position or
the OFF position, the front and rear
lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.
Front room lamp
•:
Press the button to turn ON the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
Re-press the button to turn OFF
the room lamp.
•:
Press the button to turn OFF the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
OAD045405
OAD045406
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Rear lamps
Rear Room Lamp Switch ( ):
Press this button to turn the room
lamp on and off.
Do not leave the lamp switches on
for an extended period of time
when the engine is turned off.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on
when the trunk is opened.
The trunk lamp comes on as long
as the trunk lid is open. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, close the trunk lid securely
after using the trunk.
Vanity mirror lamp
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or dam-
age the sunvisor.
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAD045408OAD045407 OAD045410
3-110
Convenient features of your vehicle
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST /
V
– Single wipe
· O / OFF – Off
· --- / INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· 1 / LO– Low wiper speed
· 2 / HI – High wiper speed
* : if equipped
B : Auto control wipe time adjust-
ment
C : Wash with brief wipes
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
MIST (
V
) : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward
and release. The wipers
will operate continuously
if the lever is held in this
position.
OFF (O) : Wiper is not in operation.
INT (---) : Wiper operates intermit-
tently at the same wiping
intervals.To vary the speed
setting, turn the speed
control knob (B).
AUTO : The rain sensor located on
the upper end of the wind-
shield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and con-
trols the wiping cycle for the
proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper
operates. When the rain
stops, the wiper stops.To
vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob (B).
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OAD045437L
OAD045438L
■ Left-hand drive
• Type A
• Type B
OAD045437R
■ Right-hand drive
3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LO (1) : The wiper runs at a lower
speed.
HI (2) : The wiper runs at a higher
speed.
Information
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer,
it may damage the wiper and washer
system.
AUTO (Automatic) control
(if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
val. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the wiper will oper-
ate once to perform a self-check of
the system. Set the wiper to OFF
position when the wiper is not in use.
i
OAD045441L
Sensor
To avoid personal injury from
the windshield wipers, when the
engine is running and the wind-
shield wiper switch is placed in
the AUTO mode:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
WARNING
3-112
Convenient features of your vehicle
• When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF (O)
position to stop the auto wiper
operation. The wiper may oper-
ate and be damaged if the switch
is set in the AUTO mode while
washing the vehicle.
• Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
Windshield washers
In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and
wiper operation will continue until you
release the lever. If the washer does
not work, you may need to add wash-
er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.
If equipped with the Headlamp
Washer, washer fluid will be sprayed
on the headlamp at the same time you
operate the windshield washer when:
1. The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
2. The light switch is in the headlamp
position.
NOTICE
OAD045404
When the outside temperature is
below freezing, ALWAYS warm
the windshield using the
defroster to prevent the washer
fluid from freezing on the wind-
shield and obscuring your vision
which could result in an accident
and serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-113
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• To prevent possible damage
to the washer pump, do not
operate the washer when the
fluid reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers and washer sys-
tem, use anti-freezing washer
fluids in the winter season or
cold weather.
CAUTION
3-114
Convenient features of your vehicle
DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM
The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
This is a supplemental system that
provides a view of the area behind
the vehicle through the A/V display
while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse)
position.
Information
Always keep the camera lens clean. The
camera may not work normally if the
lens is covered with dirt or snow.
i
The rear camera display is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the mid-
dle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
OAD045114L
OAD045113
Rear view camera (if equipped)
Do not use any cleanser con-
taining acid or alkaline deter-
gents when cleaning the lens.
Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water.
CAUTION
• Never rely solely on the rear
camera display when backing-
up.
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any
direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
WARNING
3-115
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Rear parking assist system
(if equipped)
The Rear Parking Assist System
assists the driver during reverse move-
ment of the vehicle by chiming if any
object is sensed within approximately
120 cm (50 in) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Rear Parking
Assist System
Operating condition
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
in the ON position. However, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3
mph), the system may not detect
objects.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10
km/h (6 mph), the system will not
warn you even though objects are
detected.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
OAD045110
Sensor
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-
cle to make sure there are not
any objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor.
WARNING
3-116
Convenient features of your vehicle
Types of warning sound and indicator
• The indicator may differ from the
illustration as objects or sensors
status. If the indicator blinks, we
recommend that you have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not
sound or if the buzzer sounds
intermittently when shifting into R
(Reverse) position, this may indi-
cate a malfunction with the
Parking Assist System. If this
occurs, we recommend that you
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Non-operational conditions of
Parking Assist System
The Rear Parking Assist System
may not operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with dirt or
debris such as snow or ice, or the
sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of the Rear
Parking Assist System malfunction
when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or acces-
sories have been installed, or if the
vehicle bumper height or sensor
installation has been modified.
NOTICE
Types of warning sound Indicator
When an object is approximately
60 to 120 cm (24 to 47 in) from
the rear bumper, the warning
sound beeps intermittently.
When an object is approximately
30 to 60 cm (12 to 24 in) from
the rear bumper, the warning
sound beeps more frequently.
When an object is within approx-
imately 30 cm (12 in) from the
rear bumper, the warning sound
beeps continuously.
3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is extreme-
ly hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (40 inches) and narrower than
14 cm (6 inches) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Rear parking assist system pre-
cautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not operate consistently in
some circumstances depending on
the speed of the vehicle and the
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 40 cm (15 in)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is blocked with
snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the rear
parking assist system may be inop-
erative until the snow or ice melts,
or the debris is removed. Use a
soft cloth to wipe debris away from
the sensor.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-
rounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Doing so may
cause the sensors to fail to operate
normally.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a Rear
Parking Assist System. Always
drive safely and cautiously.
WARNING
3-118
Convenient features of your vehicle
Parking Assist System
(if equipped)
The Parking Assist System assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within approximately 100 cm
(40 in) in front and 120 cm (47 in)
behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Parking Assist
System
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the
Parking Assist System button is
pressed with the engine running.
OAD045111
OAD045110
■ Front sensor
■ Rear sensor
Sensors
Sensor
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-
cle to make sure there are not
any objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor.
WARNING
OAD045112
OAD045112R
■
■
L
L
e
e
f
f
t
t
-
-
h
h
a
a
n
n
d
d
d
d
r
r
i
i
v
v
e
e
■
■
R
R
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
-
-
h
h
a
a
n
n
n
d
d
d
d
r
r
i
i
v
v
e
e
3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• The Parking Assist System button
turns on automatically and acti-
vates the Parking Assist System
when you move the shift lever to
the R (Reverse) position. However,
if the vehicle speed exceeds 10
km/h (6 mph), the system will not
warn you even though objects are
detected, and if the vehicle speed
exceeds 20 km/h (12 mph), the
system will turn off automatically.
To turn on the system, press the
Parking Assist System button.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
100cm~61cm Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
120cm~61cm Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60cm~31cm
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30cm
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
• The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors
status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction with the Parking Assist System. If this occurs, we rec-
ommend that you have your vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE
Types of warning sound and indicator
3-120
Convenient features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
Parking Assist System
Parking Assist System may not
operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with dirt or
debris such as snow or ice, or the
sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of Parking
Assist System malfunction when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or
accessories have been installed, or
if the vehicle bumper height or sen-
sor installation has been modified.
Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m and narrower than 14 cm in
diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Parking assist system precau-
tions
• The parking assist system may not
operate consistently in some cir-
cumstances depending on the
speed of the vehicle and the
shapes of the objects detected.
• The parking assist system may mal-
function if the vehicle bumper height
or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-fac-
tory installed equipment or acces-
sories may also interfere with the
sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 40 cm (15 in)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is blocked with
snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the park-
ing assist system may be inopera-
tive until the snow or ice melts, or
the debris is removed. Use a soft
cloth to wipe debris away from the
sensor.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-
rounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Doing so may
cause the sensors to fail to operate
normally.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a
Parking Assist System. Always
drive safely and cautiously.
WARNING
3-122
Convenient features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface
of the rear window, never use
sharp instruments or window
cleaners containing abrasives to
clean the window.
Information
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this
chapter.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the cen-
ter facia switch panel. The indicator
on the rear window defroster but-
ton illuminates when the defroster
is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
Information
• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the OFF position.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on
the rear window defroster.
i
i
NOTICE
OAD045323
OAD045324
■ Manual climate control system
■ Automatic climate control system
3-123
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OAD045300
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection buttons
4. Front windshield defroster button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. A/C (Air conditioning) button
7. Air intake control button
Operating the blower when the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ON position could cause the battery
to discharge. Operate the blower
when the engine is running.
NOTICE
3-124
Convenient features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
OAD045302
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
■
Left-hand drive
3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and
Defrost air position.
OAD045302R
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
■
Right-hand drive
OAD045301
3-126
Convenient features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
MAX A/C-Level (B, D, F)
To operate the MAX A/C, turn the
temperature selection knob to
extreme left. Air flow is directed
toward the upper body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
OAD045303
3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm and
hot air or left position for cooler air.
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, press the control button.
OAD045304
OAD045332
■ Front
■ Rear
OAD045305 OAD045306
3-128
Convenient features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Information
It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heater in the recircu-
lated air position (without air condi-
tioning selected) will cause fogging of
the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger compart-
ment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
i
• Continuous operation of the
climate control system in the
recirculated air position may
allow humidity to increase
inside the vehicle which may
fog the glass and obscure vis-
ibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continuous operation of the
climate control system in the
recirculated air position can
cause drowsiness or sleepi-
ness, and loss of vehicle con-
trol. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion as much as possible
while driving.
WARNING
3-129
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
Air conditioning (A/C)
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
OAD045308 OAD045309
3-130
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recircu-
lated air position. Be sure to return
the control to the fresh air position
when the irritation has passed to
keep fresh air in the vehicle. This
will help keep the driver alert and
comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with R-134a or R1234yf
refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
Information
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regulation
in your country at the time of produc-
tion. You can find out which air condi-
tioning refrigerant is applied to your
vehicle on the label located inside of
the hood.
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or sal-
vaged vehicle and new replace-
ment MAC evaporators shall be
certified (and labeled) as meet-
ing SAE Standard J2842.
NOTICE
i
3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine
overheating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air condi-
tioning system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside the
vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to elec-
trical equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the win-
dows closed.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristics.
i
3-132
Convenient features of your vehicle
System maintenance
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe con-
ditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air filter
inspections and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the com-
pressor and abnormal system opera-
tion may occur.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
i
i
We recommend that the air con-
ditioning system be serviced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper service may cause
serious injury to the person per-
forming the service.
WARNING
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
ODH044365R
ODH043366
■ Example
• Type B
• Type A
3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
You can find out which air condition-
ing refrigerant is applied to your vehi-
cle on the label located inside of the
hood.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and com-
pressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3
Vehicles equipped with R-134a
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING
Vehicles equipped with
R-1234yf
Because the refriger-
ant is mildly inflam-
mable at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and
certified technicians.
It is important that the
correct type and amount of oil
and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause dam-
age to the vehicle and personal
injury.
WARNING
3-134
Convenient features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OAD045310
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. Passenger’s temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. SYNC button
5. OFF button
6. Fan speed control button
7. Mode selection button
8. Air conditioning button
9. Front windshield defrost button
10. Air intake control button
11. Rear window defrost button
12. Climate control information screen
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
NOTICE
3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically according to the tem-
perature setting.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
Information
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
(Press the button one more time to
deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience, use the
AUTO button and set the tempera-
ture to 23°C (73°F).
i
OAD045311
OAD045312
3-136
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Never place anything near the sensor
to ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this
case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons select-
ed. When pressing any button except
the AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1.Start the engine.
2.Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6.If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
i
OAD045313
3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
OAD045302
OAD045302R
■
Left-hand drive
■
Right-hand drive
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
3-138
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
OAD045314
3-139
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left
(Rear : down) to the maximum posi-
tion. To open the vent, rotate it right
(Rear : up) to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OAD045316
OAD045304
OAD045332
■ Front
■ Rear
3-140
Convenient features of your vehicle
Temperature control
Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust
the driver and passenger side tem-
perature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the driver side temperature
control knob. The driver and pas-
senger side temperature will be
adjusted equally.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
• Press the “SYNC” button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control knob to adjust the driv-
er side temperature.
• Operate the passenger side tem-
perature control knob to adjust the
passenger side temperature.
OAD045317
OAD045318
3-141
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
This is a normal condition. You can
switch the temperature mode between
Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;
- Automatic climate control system
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds or more. The display will
change from Centigrade to
Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
- “User setting mode” in the cluster :
You can change the temperature
unit in the “Other features -
Temperature unit”
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
OAD045319
3-142
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side win-
dows and the air within the passenger
compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pushing the fan
speed control button.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
i
• Continued climate control
system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control sys-
tem operation in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING
OAD045320
3-143
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Push the OFF button of the front to
turn off the air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the
mode and air intake buttons as long
as the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
OAD045322OAD045321
3-144
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with R-134a or R1234yf
refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
Information
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regulation
in your country at the time of produc-
tion. You can find out which air condi-
tioning refrigerant is applied to your
vehicle on the label located inside of
the hood.
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or sal-
vaged vehicle and new replace-
ment MAC evaporators shall be
certified (and labeled) as meet-
ing SAE Standard J2842.
NOTICE
i
3-145
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine
overheating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air condi-
tioning system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside the
vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to elec-
trical equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the win-
dows closed.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce
humidity and moisture inside the
vehicle on rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
i
3-146
Convenient features of your vehicle
System maintenance
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
i
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
ODH044365R
ODH043366
■ Example
• Type B
• Type A
3-147
Convenient features of your vehicle
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
You can find out which air condition-
ing refrigerant is applied to your vehi-
cle on the label located inside of the
hood.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and com-
pressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3
Vehicles equipped with R-134a
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING
Vehicles equipped with
R-1234yf
Because the refriger-
ant is mildly inflam-
mable at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and
certified technicians.
It is important that the
correct type and amount of oil
and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause dam-
age to the vehicle and personal
injury.
WARNING
3-148
Convenient features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up inside of the wind-
shield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be select-
ed automatically. Additionally, the air
conditioning (if equipped) will auto-
matically operate if the mode is
selected to the position.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
WWINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
lower speed.
WARNING
OAD045325
3-149
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning (if equipped) will be
selected automatically.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature, outside (fresh) air
position and higher fan speed will
be selected automatically.
If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh)
air position and higher fan speed are
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button or knob manu-
ally.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is controlled to higher fan
speed.
OAD045326
OAD045327
3-150
Convenient features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected auto-
matically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is controlled to higher fan
speed.
Defogging logic (if equipped)
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. Press the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 10 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Automatic climate control sys-
tem
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The climate control information
screen will blink 3 times. It indicates
that the defogging logic is canceled
or returned to the programmed sta-
tus.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OAD045328
3-151
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Auto defogging system
(only for automatic climate
control system, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
Information
The auto defogging system may not
operate normally, when the outside
temperature is below -10 °C.
When the Auto Defogging
System operates, the indi-
cator will illuminate.
If higher level of moisture are sensed
in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging
System will operate in the following
order:
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
If the air conditioning is off or recircu-
lated air position is manually selected
while Auto Defogging System is ON,
the Auto Defogging System Indicator
will blink 3 times to signal that the
manual operation has been canceled.
To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging
System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
When the Auto Defogging System is
canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink
3 times and the ADS OFF will be dis-
played on the climate control infor-
mation screen.
When the Auto Defogging System is
reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6
times without a signal.
Information
• When the air conditioning is turned
on by Auto defogging system, if you
try to turn off the air conditioning, the
indicator will blink 3 times and the air
conditioning will not be turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recircu-
lated air position while Auto defog-
ging system is operating.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
i
i
OAD045331
3-152
Convenient features of your vehicle
CLIMATE CONTROL ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Cluster ionizer (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system operates,
the outside (fresh) air will be select-
ed automatically for ventilating the
car. Then, if you select the recirculat-
ed air position, the outside (fresh) air
will be selected automatically after 3
minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
3-154
Convenient features of your vehicle
Glove box
To open:
Pull the lever (1).
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
To open:
Press the cover and the holder will
slowly open. Place your sunglasses
in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.
To close:
Push back into position.
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use.
An open glove box door can
cause serious injury to the pas-
senger in an accident, even if the
passenger is wearing a seat belt.
WARNING
OAD045413
OAD045412R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
OAD045412
3-155
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Multi box (if equipped)
To open the cover, press the cover
and it will slowly open. To close the
cover, press the cover and it will
slowly close.
For the safety of the passengers,
when the cover is closed, the cover
locks if the vehicle shakes by sudden
acceleration and braking.
To unlock the cover, press the cover
twice.
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
WARNING
OAD045414
3-157
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage elec-
trical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
Sunvisor
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor forward or back-
ward (4) as needed (if equipped). Use
the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets.
Information
Close the vanity mirror cover securely
and return the sunvisor to its original
position after use.
Do not put several tickets in the
ticket holder at one time. This
could cause damage to the ticket
holder.
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a hot vehicle. It may
explode.
WARNING
OAD045418L
For your safety, do not block your
view when using the sunvisor.
WARNING
3-158
Convenient features of your vehicle
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 180
W(Watt) with the engine running.
To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets :
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug after
use. Using the accessory plug
for prolonged periods of time
with the engine off could cause
the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than 180
W(Watt) in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power out-
let.
• Close the cover when not in use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet.These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other elec-
tronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat and the
fuse may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electri-
cal/electronic devices with
reverse current protection. The
current from the battery may
flow into the vehicle's electri-
cal/electronic system and cause
system malfunction.
NOTICE
OAD045419
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.
WARNING
3-159
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
USB charger
The USB charger is located inside
the console box between the driver’s
seat and the front passenger’s seat.
Insert the USB charger into the USB
port, and re-charge a smart phone or
a tablet PC.
• A charging status/charging com-
pletion message is displayed on a
screen of a smart phone or a tablet
PC.
• A smart phone or a tablet PC may
get warmer during the re-charging
process. It does not indicate any
malfunction with the charging sys-
tem.
• A smart phone or a tablet PC,
which adopts a different re-charg-
ing method, may not be properly
re-charged. In this case, use an
exclusive charger of your device.
• The charging terminal is only to re-
charge a device. Do not use the
charging terminal either to turn ON
an audio or to play media on the
AVN.
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
To use the cigarette lighter, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC or ON
position.
Push the cigarette lighter all the way
into its socket. When the element is
heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OAD045428 OAD045440L
3-160
Convenient features of your vehicle
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.)
may damage the socket or cause
electrical failure.
Clock
For more details, please refer to
the manual that was supplied with
your vehicle.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To hang items, pull the hanger down.
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.
NOTICE
OAD045421
Do not adjust the clock while
driving.You may lose your steer-
ing control and cause severe
personal injury or accidents.
WARNING
Do not hang other objects
except clothes. In an accident it
may cause vehicle damage or
personal injury.
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after
it is already heated because it
will overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it
to prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects
into the socket of the cigarette
lighter. It may damage the cig-
arette lighter.
WARNING
3-161
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Floor mat anchor(s)
(if equipped)
ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the four
holders located in the cargo area to
attach the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to obtain a luggage net.
Vehicles equipped with a luggage
rail system may use the shackles
to hook the luggage net.
NOTICE
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
HYUNDAI recommends that the
HYUNDAI floor mat designed for
use in your vehicle be installed.
WARNING
ODM042334
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAD045423
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-
gage net when the strap has vis-
ible signs of wear or damage.
WARNING
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
CAUTION
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-162
Multimedia System
Multimedia system.................................................4-2
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port ................................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-3
Steering wheel audio control ........................................4-4
Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) .................4-5
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free ..........4-5
How vehicle radio works.................................................4-6
Audio (Without Touch Screen) ............................4-9
Feature of Your Audio...................................................4-10
Radio Mode (Type A-1, Type A-2, Type A-3,
Type A-4 with RDS)........................................................4-28
Radio Mode (Type A-5, Type A-6).............................4-30
Media Mode......................................................................4-31
Phone Mode ....................................................................4-38
Setup Mode
(Type A-1, Type A-2, Type A-3, Type A-4).............4-40
Setup Mode (Type A-5, Type A-6).............................4-46
Audio (With Touch Screen) ................................4-54
Feature of Your Audio...................................................4-55
Radio Mode
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3, Type B-4) ..............4-72
Radio Mode (Type B-5, Type B-6).............................4-74
Media Mode......................................................................4-75
Phone Mode .....................................................................4-90
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3, Type B-4) ..............4-90
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(Type B-5, Type B-6).....................................................4-97
Setup Mode
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3, Type B-4) ............4-103
Setup Mode (Type B-5, Type B-6) ..........................4-110
Declaration of Conformity ..............................4-117
FCC ..................................................................................4-117
CE for EU ........................................................................4-119
NCC for Taiwan..............................................................4-121
ACMA for Australia ......................................................4-122
ANATEL for Brazil.........................................................4-124
SMA for Jamaica...........................................................4-127
IFETEL for Mexico........................................................4-128
MOC for Israel ...............................................................4-129
4
4-2
Multimedia System
Information
• If you install an aftermarket HID
headlamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration.
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port
You can use an AUX port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to plug
in an USB and also in an iPod
®
port.
Information
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
i
OAD045427
i
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
4-3
Multimedia System
4
Antenna
Shark fin antenna (1, if equipped)
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmit data.
(for example : GPS)
Glass antenna (2)
Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to
receive both AM and FM signals.
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a cleaner
or use a scraper to remove for-
eign deposits as this may cause
damage to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can degrade the receiving AM
and FM broadcast signals.
• To prevent damage to the rear
glass antenna, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaner
containing abrasives to clean
the window. Clean the inside
surface of the rear glass window
with a piece of soft cloth.
• When putting a sticker on the
inside surface of the rear win-
dow, be careful not to damage to
the rear glass antenna.
• Do not put sharp instruments
nearby the rear glass antenna.
• Tinted rear window may affect the
proper functioning of the antenna.
NOTICENOTICE
OAD045424
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio control but-
ton is installed for your convenience.
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Move the VOLUME lever up to
increase volume.
• Move the VOLUME lever down to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved
up or down and held for 0.8 second
or more, it will function in the follow-
ing modes.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button. It will SEEK until you
release the button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved
up or down, it will function in the fol-
lowing modes.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION UP/DOWN button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN button.
MODE ( ) (3)
Press the MODE button to select
Radio, Disc, or AUX.
MUTE ( ) (4)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button again to activate
the sound.
Information
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.
i
NOTICE
OAD045425
OAD045444L
4-4
Multimedia System
■ Type A
■ Type B
Audio / Video / Navigation sys-
tem (AVN) (if equipped)
Detailed information for the AVN sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free (if equipped)
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone
• Audio : For detailed information,
refer to “AUDIO” in this chapter.
• AVN : Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free is described in the man-
ual supplied separately.
OAD045445L
OAD045430
4-5
Multimedia System
4
■ Type A
■ Type B
4-6
Multimedia System
How vehicle radio works
FM reception
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle. This signal is then received by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM (MW, LW) reception
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature
of the earth rather than travelling
straight out into the atmosphere. In
addition, they curve around obstruc-
tions so that they can provide better
signal coverage.
OJF045309L
OJF045308L
4-7
Multimedia System
4
FM radio station
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade at short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are eas-
ily affected by buildings, mountains,
or other obstructions. These can
result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The
following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble :
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
OJF045311L
¢¢¢
JBM004
OJF045310L
4-8
Multimedia System
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with the
audio equipment. In such a case, use
the cellular phone at a place as far as
possible from the audio equipment.
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
separate external antenna must be
fitted. When a cellular phone or a
radio set is used with an internal
antenna alone, it may interfere
with the vehicle's electrical sys-
tem and adversely affect safe
operation of the vehicle.
NOTICE
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING
4-9
Multimedia System
4
AUDIO (Without Touch Screen)
■ Type A-1 ■ Type A-2
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
ADA50000EE/ADA50001EE
4-10
Multimedia System
Feature of Your Audio
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO (Type A-1)
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music*, BT Audio* mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music*,
BT Audio*.
*if equipped
(4) PHONE (Type A-1)
• Operates Phone Screen.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) SEEK TRACK
• Radio mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode
- Shortly press the button : Moves
to next or previous song (file).
- Press and hold the button :
Rewinds or fast-forwards the cur-
rent song.
*if equipped
(6) POWER/VOLUME knob
• Power knob : Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob.
• Volume knob : Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right.
(7) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)
• Radio mode : Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels).
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode
- [RPT] : Repeat
- [RDM] : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
*if equipped
4-11
Multimedia System
4
(8) DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed, sets Screen Off ➟ Screen
On ➟ Screen Off.
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
• In the Screen Off state, press any
button to turn the Screen On again.
(9) TA/SCAN
• Radio mode
- Shortly press the button :
TA On/Off.
- Press and hold the button :
Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each.
• CD, USB, My Music* mode
- Press and hold the button :
Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
- Press and hold the button again
to continue listening to the cur-
rent song (file).
*if equipped
(10) SETUP/CLOCK
• Shortly press the button : Moves to
the Display, Sound, Clock, Phone,
System setting modes.
• Press and hold the button : Move to
the Time setting screen.
(11) MENU
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
•iPod
®
List : Move to parent category.
(12) FOLDER
• MP3 CD / USB mode : Folder
Search.
(13) TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode :
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right.
When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
*if equipped
4-12
Multimedia System
(14) FM (Type A-2)
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA.
(15) AM (Type A-2)
• Changes to AM ➟ AMA mode.
4-13
Multimedia System
4
ADA50002EE/ADA50003EE
■
Type A-3 ■ Type A-4
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
4-14
Multimedia System
Feature of Your Audio
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO (Type A-3)
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music*, BT Audio* mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music*,
BT Audio*.
*if equipped
(4) PHONE (Type A-3)
• Operates Phone Screen.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) SEEK TRACK
• Radio mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode
- Shortly press the button : Moves
to next or previous song (file).
- Press and hold the button :
Rewinds or fast-forwards the cur-
rent song.
*if equipped
(6) PWR/VOL knob
• Power knob : Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob.
• Volume knob : Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right.
(7) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)
• Radio mode : Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels).
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode
- [RPT] : Repeat
- [RDM] : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
*if equipped
4-15
Multimedia System
4
(8) DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed, sets Screen Off ➟ Screen
On ➟ Screen Off.
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
• In the Screen Off state, press any
button to turn the Screen On again.
(9) TA/SCAN
• Radio mode
- Shortly press the button : TA
On/Off.
- Press and hold the button :
Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each.
• CD, USB, My Music* mode
- Press and hold the button :
Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
- Press and hold the button again
to continue listening to the cur-
rent song (file).
*if equipped
(10) SETUP/CLOCK
• Shortly press the button : Moves to
the Display, Sound, Clock, Phone,
System setting modes.
• Press and hold the button : Move to
the Time setting screen.
(11) MENU
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
•iPod
®
List : Move to parent category.
(12) FOLDER
• MP3 CD / USB mode : Folder
Search.
(13) TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode :
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right.
When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
*if equipped
4-16
Multimedia System
(14) FM (Type A-4)
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA.
(15) AM (Type A-4)
• Changes to AM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode changed in order of AM
➟ AMA.
4-17
Multimedia System
4
ADA50004EE/ADA50005EE
■
Type A-5 ■ Type A-6
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
4-18
Multimedia System
Feature of Your Audio
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO (Type A-5)
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music*, BT Audio* mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music*,
BT Audio*.
*if equipped
(4) PHONE (Type A-5)
• Operates Phone Screen.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) SEEK TRACK
• Radio mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode
- Shortly press the button : Moves
to next or previous song (file).
- Press and hold the button :
Rewinds or fast-forwards the cur-
rent song.
*if equipped
(6) PWR/VOL knob
• Power knob : Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob.
• Volume knob : Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right.
(7) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)
• Radio mode : Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels).
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode
- [RPT] : Repeat
- [RDM] : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
*if equipped
4-19
Multimedia System
4
(8) DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed, sets Screen Off ➟ Screen
On ➟ Screen Off.
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
• In the Screen Off state, press any
button to turn the Screen On again.
(9) SCAN
• Radio mode
- Press the button : Previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
• CD, USB, My Music* mode
- Press the button : Previews each
song (file) for 10 seconds each.
- Press the button again to contin-
ue listening to the current song
(file).
*if equipped
(10) SETUP/CLOCK
• Shortly press the button : Moves to
the Display, Sound, Clock, Phone,
System setting modes.
• Press and hold the button : Move to
the Time setting screen.
(11) MENU
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
•iPod
®
List : Move to parent category.
(12) FOLDER
• MP3 CD / USB mode : Folder
Search.
(13) TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music* mode :
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right.
When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
*if equipped
4-20
Multimedia System
(14) FM (Type A-6)
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2.
(15) AM (Type A-6)
• Changes to AM mode.
Information
- Using the Discs
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to venti-
late before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges
or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it
from the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted
into the CD player (Do not insert more
than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not oper-
ate normally according to manufac-
turing companies or making and
recording methods. In such circum-
stances, continued use may cause
malfunctions to your audio system.
Information
- Playing an Incompatible
Copy Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a copy
protected CD may indicate that the
CD is defective, not the CD player.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in
the folder, that folder is not dis-
played.
i
i
4-21
Multimedia System
4
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product malfunc-
tion. Continued use in such
conditions could lead to acci-
dents (fires, electric shock) or
product malfunctions.
• Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to light-
ning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in park-
ing-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehi-
cle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the igni-
tion turned off could result in
battery discharge.
• Operating the device while driving
could lead to accidents due to a
lack of attention to external sur-
roundings. First park the vehicle
before operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where external
sounds cannot be heard may lead
to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume set-
ting when turning the device on. A
sudden output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment.
(Adjust the volume to a suitable
levels before turning off the
device.)
• If you want to change the position
of device installation, please
inquire with your place of pur-
chase or service maintenance
center. Technical expertise is
required to install or disassemble
the device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate
the audio system for long periods
of time with the ignition turned off
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of the
monitor may cause damage to the
LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device, make
sure to turn off the device and use
a dry and smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical cloths,
or solvents (alcohol, benzene,
thinners, etc.) as such materials
may damage the device panel or
cause color/quality deterioration
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling bever-
ages may lead to system malfunc-
tion.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
NOTICE
4-22
Multimedia System
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
4-23
Multimedia System
4
Information
- Using the USB Device
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connect-
ed when starting up the vehicle.
Connect the device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB flash-
drives are very sensitive to electric
shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned
off while the external USB device is
connected, the external USB device
may not work.
• The System may not play inauthen-
tic MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between 8Kbps ~
320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electrici-
ty when connecting or disconnecting
the external USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected
external USB device can be unrec-
ognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector set-
ting of External USB device is not
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then
the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recogniz-
able.
• Make sure the USB connection ter-
minal does not come in contact with
the human body or other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or discon-
nect the USB device in a short peri-
od of time, it may break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise when
connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device can
be damaged or may malfunction.
Therefore, disconnect the external
USB device when the audio is
turned off or in another mode. (e.g,
Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity
of the external USB device or the
type of the files stored in the device,
there is a difference in the time
taken for recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for pur-
poses other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is
not supported.
(Continued)
i
4-24
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB I/F
may lower performance or cause
trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB hub
purchased separately, the vehicle’s
audio system may not recognize the
USB device. In that case, connect
the USB device directly to the multi-
media terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logi-
cal drives, only the music files on the
highest-priority drive are recog-
nized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard USB
I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may not
be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (i-
stick type)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
MENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on a
personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB
memory products which
can be used as key
chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause dam-
age to the USB jack. Please make
certain only to use plug type connec-
tor products.
Information
- Using the iPod
®
Device
• Some iPod
®
models may not sup-
port communication protocol and
files may not properly play.
Supported iPod
®
models :
- iPhone
®
3GS/4
- iPod
®
touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod
®
nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod
®
classic
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod
®
can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod
®
. (Reset:
Refer to iPod
®
manual)
• An iPod
®
may not operate normally
on low battery.
(Continued)
i
4-25
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
devices, such as the
iPhone
®
, can be connected through
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology capa-
bility (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ). The
device can play, but it will not be con-
trolled by the audio system.
• To use iPod
®
features within the
audio, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod
®
device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the charac-
teristics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to both
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be
properly played. In your iPhone
®
,
select the Dock connector or
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to
change the sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod
®
with the
iPod
®
Power Cable, insert the con-
nector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted complete-
ly, communications between iPod
®
and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects of
the iPod
®
and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will
overlap and might reduce or distort
the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod
®
when adjusting
the audio system’s volume, and turn
off the equalizer of the audio system
when using the equalizer of an
iPod
®
.
• When not using iPod
®
with car audio,
detach the iPod
®
cable from iPod
®
.
Otherwise, iPod
®
may remain in
accessory mode, and may not work
properly.
• Beside support 1M cable when pur-
chasing iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products,
Long Cable cannot be recognized.
Information
- Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Cellular Phone
(if equipped)
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phones
through the audio system.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com. Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio features.
(Continued)
i
4-26
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Hyundai is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
- Answering and placing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
calls
- Menu operation during call
(Switch to Private, Switch to call
waiting, Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto
Download
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
• Before using Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
operations.
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related fea-
tures.
• Pairing and connecting a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled mobile
phone will work only when the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
option within your mobile phone
has been turned on. (Methods of
turning on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled feature may
differ depending on the mobile
phone.)
• Do not use a cellular phone or per-
form Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
settings (e.g. pairing a phone) while
driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, the
phone will not be found during
device searches if the phone has
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power is turned off. Disable the hid-
den state or turn on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology power prior to
searching/connecting with the car
audio system.
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your phone
(in the car) is outside of the cellular
service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a
underground, in a mountainous
area, etc.).
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system or cel-
lular service stations can be dis-
turbed.
(Continued)
4-27
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
• Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference noise or mal-
function to audio system. In this case,
store the device in a different location
may resolve the condition.
• While a phone is connected through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology your
phone may discharge quicker than
usual for additional Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology-related opera-
tions.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want to automatically
connect your Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, try the following.
1) Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your
mobile phone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2) Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
- To turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature in
your car audio system, go to
[SETUP/CLOCK] > [Phone] and
[turn off] the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection may become intermit-
tently disconnected in some mobile
phones. Follow these steps to try
again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try
again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5) Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not be
displayed correctly.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• In some mobile phones, starting the
ignition while talking through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result in
the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your mobile
phone when starting the ignition.)
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to enter
Phone mode. Once a phone is paired
or connected, the guidance screen
will be displayed.
4-28
Multimedia System
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that
enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the car
audio system with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
allows the user to conveniently
make calls, receive calls, and
manage the phone book. Before
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, carefully read the
contents of this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negli-
gent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for pro-
longed periods of time is dan-
gerous and may lead to acci-
dents.
• When driving, view the screen
only for short periods of time.
Radio Mode
(Type A-1, Type A-2, Type A-3,
Type A-4 with RDS)
With the Radio Mode Button
SEEK
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button.
• Shortly pressing the button :
Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the button :
Automatically searches for the next
frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the [1] ~ [6] button.
• Shortly pressing the button : Plays
the frequency saved in the corre-
sponding button.
• Pressing and holding the button :
Pressing and holding the desired
button from [1] ~ [6] will save the
currently playing broadcast to the
selected button and sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the [TA/SCAN] button.
• Pressing and holding the button :
The broadcast frequency increas-
es and previews each broadcast
for 5 seconds each. After scanning
all frequencies, returns and plays
the current broadcast frequency.
NOTICE
4-29
Multimedia System
4
Selecting through manual search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
Traffic Announcement (TA)
Shortly pressing the [TA/SCAN] button
: Set [On/Off] TA (Traffic Announcement)
mode.
MENU : Radio
Within [MENU] button are the AST
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
AST (Auto Store) : [1] Button
Select AST (Auto Store) to save fre-
quencies with superior reception to
presets [1] ~ [6]. If no frequencies
are received, then the most recently
received frequency will be broad-
cast.
Saves only to the Preset memory [1]
~ [6] of FMA or AMA mode.
AF (Alternative Frequency) :
[2] Button
The Alternative Frequency option
can be turned On/Off.
Region : [3] Button
The Region option can be turned
On/Off.
News : [4] Button
The News option can be turned
On/Off.
4-30
Multimedia System
Radio Mode
(Type A-5, Type A-6)
With the Radio Mode Button
SEEK
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button
• Shortly pressing the button :
Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the button :
Automatically searches for the next
frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the [1] ~ [6] button
• Shortly pressing the button : Plays
the frequency saved in the corre-
sponding button.
• Pressing and holding the button :
Pressing and holding the desired
button from [1] ~ [6] will save the
currently playing broadcast to the
selected button and sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the [SCAN] button
• Shortly pressing the button : The
broadcast frequency increases
and previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the
current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the button :
Previews the broadcasts saved in
Preset [1] ~ [6] for 5 seconds
each.
Selecting through manual search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
MENU : Radio
Within [MENU] button is the A.Store
(Auto Store).
A.Store (Auto Store) : [1] Button
Select A.Store(Auto Store) to save
frequencies with superior reception
to presets [1] ~ [6]. If no frequencies
are received, then the most recently
received frequency will be broad-
cast.
4-31
Multimedia System
4
Media Mode
With the Media Mode Button
Press the [MEDIA] button to change
the mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod
®
) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music* ➟
BT Audio*.
*if equipped
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
The CD is automatically played when
a CD is inserted.
The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing [RPT]
button
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My
Music* mode : RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Shortly press-
ing the button) : Repeats the cur-
rent song.
MP3 CD, USB mode : FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice) :
repeats all files within the current
folder.
Press the [RPT] button again to turn
off repeat.
*if equipped
■ My Music Mode
■ USB Mode
■ MP3 CD Mode
■ Audio CD Mode
4-32
Multimedia System
Random
While song (file) is playing [RDM]
button
Audio CD, My Music* mode : RDM
on screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the but-
ton) : Plays all songs in random
order.
MP3 CD, USB mode : FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Shortly pressing
the button) : Plays all files within
the current folder in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode : ALL RDM on
screen
• Random (pressing twice) : Plays all
files in random order.
iPod
®
mode : RDM on screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the but-
ton) : Plays all files in random order.
Press the [RDM] button again to turn
off random.
*if equipped
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing [SEEK
TRACK
∨
] button
• Shortly pressing the button : Plays
the current song from the begin-
ning.
If the [SEEK TRACK
∨
] button is
pressed again within 1 second, the
previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the button :
Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing [SEEK
TRACK
∧
] button
• Shortly pressing the button : Plays
the next song.
• Pressing and holding the button :
Fast forwards the song.
Scan (With RDS)
• Pressing and holding the [TA/
SCAN] button : Scans all songs for
10 seconds starting from the next
song.
• Pressing and holding the [TA/
SCAN] button again to turn off.
• The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod
®
mode.
Scan (Without RDS)
• Shortly pressing the [SCAN] but-
ton : Scans all songs from the next
song for 10 seconds each.
• Press the [SCAN] button again to
turn off.
• The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod
®
mode.
4-33
Multimedia System
4
Folder Search
(Only MP3 CD, USB mode)
While file is playing [FOLDER
∧
]
button
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing [FOLDER
∨
]
button
• Searches the parent folder.
If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches for
songs (files).
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
MENU : Audio CD
Press the Audio CD mode [MENU]
button to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Repeat : [1] Button
Repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn off.
Random : [2] Button
Randomly play songs within the CD.
Press RDM again to turn off.
Information : [3] Button
Display information of the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the MP3 CD / USB mode
[MENU] button to set the Repeat,
Folder Random, Folder Repeat, All
Random, Information and Copy fea-
tures.
Repeat : [1] Button
Repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random : [2] Button
Randomly play songs within the cur-
rent folder.
Press F.RDM again to turn off.
4-34
Multimedia System
Folder Repeat : [3] Button
Repeat songs within the current fold-
er.
Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random : [4] Button
Randomly play all songs within the
CD / USB.
Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information : [5] Button
Display information of the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.
Copy : [6] Button (if equipped)
This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the
copied Music in My Music mode.
If another button is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up ask-
ing you whether to cancel copying is
displayed.
If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod
®
, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copying
is canceled.
Music will not be played while copy-
ing is in progress.
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod
®
mode, press the [MENU]
button to set the Repeat, Random,
Information and Search features.
Repeat : [1] Button
Repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random : [2] Button
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
Press RDM again to turn off.
4-35
Multimedia System
4
Information : [3] Button
Displays information of the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.
Search : [4] Button
Displays iPod
®
category list.
Searching iPod
®
category is [MENU]
button pressed, move to parent cate-
gory.
MENU : AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the [MEDIA] but-
ton to change to AUX mode.
AUX mode cannot be started unless
there is an external device connect-
ed to the AUX terminal.
Information
- Using the AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
i
■ Type A-5, Type A-6
■ Type A-1, Type A-2, Type A-3, Type A-4
4-36
Multimedia System
MENU : My Music (if equipped)
In My Music mode, press the
[MENU] button to set the Repeat,
Random, Information, Delete, Delete
All and Delete Selection features.
Repeat : [1] Button
Repeats the currently playing song.
Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random : [2] Button
Plays all songs in random order.
Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information : [3] Button
Displays information of the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.
Delete : [4] Button
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing
song.
• Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the [MENU] button and
select the delete menu to delete
the selected file
Delete All : [5] Button
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection : [6] Button
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁ After selecting, press the [MENU]
button and select the delete menu.
4-37
Multimedia System
4
Information
- Using the My Music
• Even if memory is available, a max-
imum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
MENU : Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio (if equipped)
If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Play / Pause : Press the TUNE knob
to play and pause the current song.
The previous song / next song / play
/ pause functions may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
i
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
4-38
Multimedia System
Phone Mode (if equipped)
Making a call using the Steering
wheel controls
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) Mutes the microphone during a call.
(2) Press the button to change audio
source.
(With RDS)
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA ➟
CD ➟ USB(iPod
®
) ➟ AUX ➟ My
Music ➟ BT Audio.
(Without RDS)
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟AM ➟ CD ➟
USB(iPod
®
) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟
BT Audio.
(3) Raises or lowers speaker volume.
(4) Places and transfers calls.
• Check call history and making call
- Shortly press the [CALL] button
on the steering wheel controls.
- The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
- Press the [CALL] button again to
connect a call to the selected
number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
- Press and hold the [CALL] but-
ton on the steering wheel con-
trols.
- The most recently called number
is redialed.
(5) Ends calls or cancels functions.
MENU : Phone
(Type A-1, Type A-3)
Press the [PHONE] button to display
three menus (Call History, Phone
Book, Phone Setup).
History : [1] Button
The call history is displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call his-
tory is displayed. (The download fea-
ture may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
4-39
Multimedia System
4
P.Book : [2] Button
The phone book is displayed and
can be used to select a number and
make a call.
If more than one number is saved to
one phone book, then a screen
showing the mobile phone number,
Home and office number is dis-
played. Select the desired number to
make the call.
If phone book does not exist, a
screen asking whether to download
phone book is displayed. (The down-
load feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones)
Setup : [3] Button
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is dis-
played. For more information, refer to
“Phone Setup”.
MENU : Phone (Type A-5)
Press the [PHONE] button to dis-
play three menus (Call History,
Contacts, Phone Setup).
History : [1] Button
The call history is displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call his-
tory is displayed. (The download fea-
ture may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Contacts : [2] Button
The contacts are displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If more than one number is saved to
one contact, then a screen showing
the mobile phone number, Home and
office number is displayed. Select the
desired number to make the call.
If contacts do not exist, a screen ask-
ing whether to download contacts
are displayed. (The download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Setup : [3] Button
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is dis-
played. For more information, refer to
“Phone Setup”.
4-40
Multimedia System
Setup Mode
(Type A-1, Type A-2, Type A-3,
Type A-4)
With the Display Button
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Display]
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes [On]
selection mode
• During On state, press the
[RADIO] or [MEDIA] button to dis-
play the mode change pop up
screen.
Scroll text
[Scroll text] Set [On/Off]
• [On] : Maintains scroll
• [Off] : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Song Info
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
With the Sound Button
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Sound]
Audio Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
4-41
Multimedia System
4
Select [Audio Settings] Select
menu
• Return : While adjusting values, re-
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
Set [Off/On]
With the Clock Button
Press the
[SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Clock]
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings]
Adjust the number currently in focus
to set the [hour] and press the TUNE
knob to set the [minute].
Day Settings
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Day Settings]
Adjust the number currently in focus
to make the settings and press the
TUNE knob to move to the next set-
ting.
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12hr/
24hr.
4-42
Multimedia System
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set
[On/Off]
• [On] : Displays time/date on screen
• [Off] : Turn off.
Automatic RDS Time (With RDS)
This option is used to automatically
set the time by synchronizing with
RDS.
Select [Automatic RDS Time] Set
[On/Off]
• [On] : Turn on Automatic Time
• [Off] : Turn off.
Information
Because some local radio stations do
not support an automatic RDS time
function, some RDS Transmitters may
not provide correct time.
If incorrect time is displayed, set it
manually following the Step “Clock
Settings” in previous page.
With the Phone Button
(if equipped)
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Phone]
To pair a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled mobile
phone, authentication and con-
nection processes are first
required. As a result, you cannot
pair your mobile phone while driv-
ing the vehicle. First park your
vehicle before use.
Pair Phone
Select [Pair Phone]
➀ Search for device names as dis-
played on your mobile phone and
connect.
❈ SSP : Secure Simple Pairing
Non SSP supported device :
➁ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
NOTICE
i
4-43
Multimedia System
4
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
SSP supported device :
➁ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
The device name and passkey will
be displayed on the screen for up to
3 minutes. If pairing is not completed
within the 3 minutes, the mobile
phone pairing process will automati-
cally be canceled.
➂ Pairing completion is displayed.
In some mobile phones, pairing will
automatically be followed by connec-
tion.
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones.
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones
will be displayed.
A [] is displayed in front of the cur-
rently connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
• Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone Select [Connect Phone]
➀ Select a mobile phone that is not
currently connected.
➁ Connect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Connection completion is dis-
played.
If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and select a new phone to
connect.
4-44
Multimedia System
• Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone Select [Disconnect Phone]
➀ Select the currently connected
mobile phone.
➁ Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Disconnection completion is dis-
played.
• Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (pri-
ority) of automatic connection for the
paired mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select
[Priority] Select No. 1 Priority
mobile phone
➀ Select [Priority].
➁ From the paired phones, select
the phone desired for No.1 priority.
➂ The changed priority sequence is
displayed.
Once the connection sequence (pri-
ority) is changed, the new no. 1 pri-
ority mobile phone will be connected.
When the no. 1 priority cannot be
connected : Automatically attempts
to connect the most recently con-
nected phone.
Cases when the most recently con-
nected phone cannot be connected :
Attempts to connect in the order in
which paired phones are listed.
The connected phone will automati-
cally be changed to No. 1 priority.
• Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone Select [Delete]
➀ Select the desired mobile phone.
➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.
➂ Deletion completion is displayed.
When attempting to delete a current-
ly connected phone, the phone is
first disconnected.
• When you delete a mobile phone,
the mobile phone phone book will
also be erased.
• For stable
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication,
delete the mobile phone from
the audio and also delete the
audio from your mobile phone.
NOTICE
4-45
Multimedia System
4
Phone book Download
This feature is used to download
phone book and call histories into
the audio system.
Select [Phone book Download]
• The download feature may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.
• When downloading new phone
book, delete all previously saved
phone book before starting
download.
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it
is possible to automatically download
new phone book and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set [On/Off]
Outgoing Volume
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party
while on a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set volume
Even while on a call, the volume can
be changed by using the
[SEEK TRACK] button.
Bluetooth System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system.
Select [Bluetooth System Off].
If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system off.
Using the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
To use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology when the system is cur-
rently off, follow these next steps.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the [PHONE]
button.
Press the [PHONE] button Screen
Guidance
Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions can be used and displays
guidance.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the [SETUP/
CLOCK] button.
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Phone]
➀ A screen asking whether to turn
on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
will be displayed.
➁ On the screen, select [YES] to
turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology and display guidance.
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
system is turned on, the system will
automatically try to connect the most
recently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
NOTICE
4-46
Multimedia System
With the System Button
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [System]
Memory Information (if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
The system will reboot after the lan-
guage is changed.
• Language support by region
Setup Mode
(Type A-5, Type A-6)
With the Display Button
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Display]
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes [On]
selection mode
• During On state, press the
[RADIO] or [MEDIA] button to dis-
play the mode change pop up
screen.
4-47
Multimedia System
4
Text Scroll
[Text Scroll] Set [On/Off]
• [On] : Maintains scroll
• [Off] : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
With the Sound Button
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Sound]
Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select menu
• Return : While adjusting values, re-
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
Set [Off/On]
4-48
Multimedia System
With the Clock Button
Press the
[SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Clock]
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings]
Adjust the number currently in focus
to set the [hour] and press the TUNE
knob to set the [minute].
Calendar Settings
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Calendar Settings]
Adjust the number currently in focus to
make the settings and press the TUNE
knob to move to the next setting.
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set
[On/Off]
•
[On]
: Displays time/date on screen
•
[Off]
: Turn off.
4-49
Multimedia System
4
With the Phone Button
(if equipped)
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Phone]
To pair a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled mobile
phone, authentication and con-
nection processes are first
required. As a result, you cannot
pair your mobile phone while driv-
ing the vehicle. First park your
vehicle before use.
Pair Phone
Select [Pair Phone]
➀ Search for device names as dis-
played on your mobile phone and
connect.
❈ SSP : Secure Simple Pairing
Non SSP supported device :
➁ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
SSP supported device :
➁ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
The device name and passkey will
be displayed on the screen for up to
3 minutes. If pairing is not completed
within the 3 minutes, the mobile
phone pairing process will automati-
cally be canceled.
➂ Pairing completion is displayed.
In some mobile phones, pairing will
automatically be followed by connec-
tion.
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones.
NOTICE
4-50
Multimedia System
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones
will be displayed.
A [
] is displayed in front of the cur-
rently connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
• Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone
Select [Connect Phone]
➀ Select a mobile phone that is not
currently connected.
➁ Connect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Connection completion is dis-
played.
If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and select a new phone to
connect.
• Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone
Select [Disconnect Phone]
➀ Select the currently connected
mobile phone.
➁ Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Disconnection completion is dis-
played.
4-51
Multimedia System
4
• Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (pri-
ority) of automatic connection for the
paired mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select
[Priority] Select No. 1 Priority
mobile phone
➀ Select [Priority].
➁ From the paired phones, select
the phone desired for No.1 priority.
➂ The changed priority sequence is
displayed.
Once the connection sequence (pri-
ority) is changed, the new no. 1 pri-
ority mobile phone will be connected.
When the no. 1 priority cannot be
connected: Automatically attempts to
connect the most recently connected
phone.
Cases when the most recently con-
nected phone cannot be connected:
Attempts to connect in the order in
which paired phones are listed.
The connected phone will automati-
cally be changed to No. 1 priority.
• Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone Select [Delete]
➀ Select the desired mobile phone.
➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.
➂ Deletion completion is displayed.
When attempting to delete a current-
ly connected phone, the phone is
first disconnected.
• When you delete a mobile
phone, the mobile phone con-
tacts will also be erased.
• For stable
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication,
delete the mobile phone from
the audio and also delete the
audio from your mobile phone.
Contacts Download
This feature is used to download
contacts and call histories into the
audio system.
Select [Contacts Download]
• The download feature may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.
• When downloading new Contacts,
delete all previously saved
Contacts before starting down-
load.
NOTICE
NOTICE
4-52
Multimedia System
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it
is possible to automatically download
new Contacts and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set [On/Off]
Outgoing Volume
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party
while on a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set vol-
ume
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the [SEEK
TRACK] button.
Bluetooth System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system.
Select [Bluetooth System Off]
If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system off.
Using the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
To use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology when the system is cur-
rently off, follow these next steps.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the [PHONE]
button
Press the [PHONE] button Screen
Guidance
Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions can be used and displays
guidance.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the
[SETUP/CLOCK] button
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [Phone]
➀A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology will
be displayed.
➁On the screen, select [YES] to turn
on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and display guidance.
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
system is turned on, the system will
automatically try to connect the most
recently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
4-53
Multimedia System
4
With the System Button
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
Select [System]
Memory Information (if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Language
This menu is used to set the display.
Select [Language]
The system will reboot after the lan-
guage is changed.
• Language support by region.
English, Português, Español
4-54
Multimedia System
AUDIO (With Touch Screen)
ADB50000EE/ADB50001EE
■
Type B-1 ■ Type B-2
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
4-55
Multimedia System
4
Feature of Your Audio
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the button is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
(4) PHONE
• Converts to Phone mode.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) POWER/VOLUME knob
• Power knob : Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob
• Volume knob : Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
(6) SEEK TRACK
When pressed shortly
• Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-
quency.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music, BT Audio
mode : changes the track, Song(file).
When pressed and held
• Radio mode : continuously changes
the frequency. Upon release, plays
the current frequency.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or
file.
• During a Handsfree call, controls the
call volume.
4-56
Multimedia System
(7) DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed, sets Screen Off ➟ Screen
On ➟ Screen Off
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
• In the Screen Off state, press any
button to turn the Screen On again.
(8) CLOCK
• Displays the time/date/day.
(9) TA/SCAN
• Radio mode
- Shortly press the button :
TA On/Off
- Press and hold the button :
Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each.
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Press and hold the button :
Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
- Press and hold the button again
to continue listening to the cur-
rent song (file).
(10) SETUP
• Converts to Setup mode.
(11) TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode :
turn to search tracks/channels/
files.
(12) FOLDER
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Folder Search
4-57
Multimedia System
4
ADB50002EE/ADB50003EE
■
Type B-3 ■ Type B-4
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
4-58
Multimedia System
Feature of Your Audio
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the button is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
(4) PHONE
• Converts to Phone mode.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) PWR/VOL knob
• Power knob : Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob
• Volume knob : Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
(6) SEEK TRACK
When pressed shortly
• Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music, BT Audio
mode : changes the track, Song(file).
When pressed and held
• Radio mode : continuously changes
the frequency. Upon release, plays
the current frequency.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or
file.
• During a Handsfree call, controls the
call volume.
4-59
Multimedia System
4
(7) DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed, sets Screen Off ➟ Screen
On ➟ Screen Off
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
• In the Screen Off state, press any
button to turn the Screen On again.
(8) CLOCK
• Displays the time/date/day.
(9) TA/SCAN
• Radio mode
- Shortly press the button : TA
On/Off
- Press and hold the button :
Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each.
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Press and hold the button :
Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
- Press and hold the button again
to continue listening to the cur-
rent song (file).
(10) SETUP
• Converts to Setup mode.
(11) TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode :
turn to search tracks/channels/
files.
(12) FOLDER
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Folder Search
4-60
Multimedia System
ADB50004EE/ADB50005EE
■
Type B-5 ■ Type B-6
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
4-61
Multimedia System
4
Feature of Your Audio
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in order of
CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music,
BT Audio.
(4) PHONE
• Converts to Phone mode.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) PWR/VOL knob
• Power knob : Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob
• Volume knob : Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
(6) SEEK TRACK
When pressed shortly
• Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music, BT Audio
mode : changes the track, Song(file).
When pressed and held
• Radio mode : continuously changes
the frequency. Upon release, plays
the current frequency.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or
file.
• During a Handsfree call, controls the
call volume.
4-62
Multimedia System
(7) DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed, sets Screen Off ➟ Screen
On ➟ Screen Off
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
• In the Screen Off state, press any
button to turn the Screen On again.
(8) CLOCK
• Displays the time/date/day.
(9) SCAN
• Radio mode : previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds
each.
• CD, USB, My Music mode : pre-
views each song (file) for 10 sec-
onds each.
(10) SETUP
• Converts to Setup mode.
(11) TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode :
turn to search tracks/channels/
files.
(12) FOLDER
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Folder
Search
4-63
Multimedia System
4
Information
- Using the Discs
• This device has been manufactured
to be compatible with software
bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,
benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc back
in its original case to prevent disc
scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damages
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances
into the disc insert/eject slot.
Introducing foreign substances
could damage the device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultane-
ously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and play-
ing times may occur depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
as used by the user.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a soft
cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also result
in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not
properly operate depending on the
disc manufacturer, production
method and the record method as
used by the user. If problems persist,
trying using a different CD as con-
tinued use may result in malfunc-
tions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CDRW
Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as Stype
CDs may not function in the device.
DATA discs cannot be played.
(However, such discs may still oper-
ate but will do so abnormally.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped discs
(8cm, heart-shaped, octagonshaped)
as such discs could lead to malfunc-
tions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 seconds,
the disc will automatically be re-
inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CDR,
CDs with labels)
i
4-64
Multimedia System
MP3 File Information
• Supported Audio Formats
❈ File formats that do not comply
with the above formats may not be
properly recognized or play with-
out properly displaying file names
or other information.
• Support for Compressed Files
1. Supported Bitrates (Kbps)
2. Sampling Frequencies (Hz)
• For MP3/WMA compression files,
differences in sound quality will
occur depending on the bitrate.
(Higher sound quality can be expe-
rienced with higher bitrates.)
• This device only recognizes files
with MP3/WMA extensions. Other
file extensions may not be properly
recognized.
3. Maximum number of recognized
folders and files
- Folder : 255 folders for CD, 2,000
folders for USB
- File : 999 files for CD, 6,000 files
for USB
❈ There are no limitations to the
number of recognized folder levels
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
44100 22050 11025 32000
48000 24000 12000 44100
3000 16000 8000 48000
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
Layer3 Layer3 Layer3
High Range
32 8 8 48
40 16 16 64
48 24 24 80
56 32 32 96
64 40 40 128
80 48 48 160
96 56 56 192
112 64 64
128 80 80
160 96 96
192 112 112
224 128 128
256 144 144
320 160 160
BIT RATE(kbps)
File System
ISO 9660 Level 1
ISO 9660 Level 2
Romeo /
Juliet (128 characters)
Audio
Compression
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3
Windows Media Audio
Ver 7.X & 8.X
4-65
Multimedia System
4
• Language Support
(Unicode Support)
1. English : 94 characters
2. Special characters and Symbols :
986 characters
❈ Languages other than Korean and
English (including Chinese) are
not included.
3. Text Display (Based on Unicode)
- File name : Maximum 64 English
characters
- Folder name : Max 32 English
characters
❈ Using the scroll feature allows you
to see the entire name of files with
names that are too long to be dis-
played at once.
• Compatibility by Disc Type
1. Playing MIXED CDs : First plays
the audio CD, then plays the com-
pressed file(s).
2. Playing EXTRA CDs : First plays
the audio CD, then plays the com-
pressed file(s).
3. Playing multisession CDs : Plays
in order of sessions
- MIXED CD : CD type in which
both MP3 and audio CD files are
recognized in one disc.
- Multisession CD CD type that
includes more than two sessions.
Different from Extra CDs, multi-
session CDs are recorded by
sessions and have no media lim-
itation.
• Precautions upon Writing CDs
1. In all cases except when creating
multisession discs, check the
close session option before creat-
ing the disc. Though product mal-
functions will not occur, some time
may be required for the device to
check whether the session state is
closed (approximately 25 sec-
onds). (Additional time may also
be required depending on the
number of folders or files.)
2. Changing the MP3/WMA file
extensions or changing files of
other extensions to MP3/WMA
may result in product malfunction.
3. When naming files with
MP3/WMA file extensions, write
using only Korean and English.
(Languages other than Korean
and English are not supported and
are displayed as blank.)
4. Unauthorized use or duplication of
music files are prohibited by law.
5. Prolonged use of CD-R/CD-RW
discs that do not satisfy related
standards and/or specifications
could result in product malfunc-
tion.
4-66
Multimedia System
Information
- Using the USB Device
• Connect the USB device after turn-
ing on the engine. The USB device
may become damaged if it is already
connected when the ignition is
turned on. The USB device may not
operate properly if the car ignition
is turned on or off with the USB
device connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting USB
devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not properly
recognize the USB is in some states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices
formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-
mats. This device does not recognize
files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be sup-
ported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB con-
nector with bodily parts or foreign
objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting
of USB devices within short periods
of time may result in product mal-
function.
• A strange noise may occur when dis-
connecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the audio
power turned off.
• The amount of time required to rec-
ognize the USB device may differ
depending on the type, size or file
formats stored in the USB. Such dif-
ferences in time are not indications
of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not sup-
ported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Such acts may lead to
worsened performance or damage
to the device.
• The device may not recognize the
USB device if separately purchased
USB hubs and extension cables are
being used. Connect the USB direct-
ly with the multimedia terminal of
the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical drives,
only files saved to the root drive can
be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
to the USBs.
• The device may not operate normal-
ly if MP3 Players, cellular phones,
digital cameras, or other electronic
devices (USB devices not recognized
as portable disk drives) are connect-
ed with the device.
(Continued)
i
4-67
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may not
work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memo-
ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using formats such
as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by con-
necting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF
Type) may not be properly recog-
nized.
• The device may not operate proper-
ly when using USB HDDs or USBs
subject to connection failures
caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-
stick type)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB mem-
ory products that can
also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or phone
through various channels, such as
AUX/BT or Audio/USB mode may
result in pop noises or abnormal
operation.
Information
- Using the iPod
®
Device
• iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod
®
while oper-
ating the buttons, you must use a
dedicated iPod
®
cable. (the cable
that is supplied when purchasing
iPod
®
/ iPhone
®
products)
• If the iPod
®
is connected to the vehicle
while it is playing, a high pitch sound
could occur for approximately 1-2
seconds immediately after connecting.
If possible, connect the iPod
®
to the
vehicle with the iPod
®
stopped/
paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting
the iPod
®
through the iPod
®
cable
will charge the iPod
®
through the
car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod
®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
i
4-68
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an external
device, such as the iPod
®
, and the
audio system are both active, EQ
effects could overlap and cause sound
deterioration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the EQ
feature within the external device
upon use by connecting with the
audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod
®
or
AUX device is connected. When such
devices are not being used, disconnect
the device for storage.
• When the iPod
®
or AUX device
power is connected to the power jack,
playing the external device may
result in noise. In such cases, discon-
nect the power connection before use.
• Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteris-
tics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
• If your iPhone is connected to both
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be prop-
erly played. In your iPhone
®
, select
the Dock connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to change the
sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• iPod
®
mode cannot be operated when
the iPod
®
cannot be recognized due
to the playing of versions that do not
support communication protocols,
cases of iPod
®
abnormalities and
defects.
• For fifth generation iPod
®
Nano
devices, the iPod
®
may not be recog-
nized when the battery level is low.
Please charge the iPod
®
for use.
• Search/play orders shown within the
iPod
®
device may differ with the
orders shown within the audio sys-
tem.
• If the iPod
®
malfunctions due to an
iPod
®
device defect, reset the iPod
®
and try again. (To learn more, refer to
your iPod
®
manual)
• Some iPod
®
s may not sync with the
System depending on its version. If
the Media is removed before the
Media is recognized, then the system
may not properly restore the previ-
ously operated mode. (iPad charging
is not supported.)
• Beside support 1M cable when pur-
chasing iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products,
Long Cable cannot be recognized.
Information
- Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only when
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones that
do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may result
in pop noises in some mobile
phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
i
4-69
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or mak-
ing an outgoing call while playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio may result in audio interfer-
ence.
Information
- Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Cellular Phone
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phones
through the audio system.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com. Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio features.
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Hyundai is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
- Answering and placing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call
(Switch to Private, Switch to call
waiting, Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto
Download
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
• Before using Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
operations.
(Continued)
i
4-70
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related fea-
tures.
• Pairing and connecting a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled mobile
phone will work only when the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
option within your mobile phone
has been turned on. (Methods of
turning on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled feature may
differ depending on the mobile
phone.)
• Do not use a cellular phone or per-
form Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing a
phone) while driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, the
phone will not be found during
device searches if the phone has
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power is turned off. Disable the hid-
den state or turn on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology power prior to
searching/connecting with the car
audio system.
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your phone
(in the car) is outside of the cellular
service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a
underground, in a mountainous
area, etc.).
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system or cel-
lular service stations can be dis-
turbed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference noise
or malfunction to audio system. In
this case, store the device in a differ-
ent location may resolve the condi-
tion.
• While a phone is connected through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
your phone may discharge quicker
than usual for additional Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology-related opera-
tions.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want to automatically
connect your Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, try the following.
(Continued)
4-71
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
1) Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your
mobile phone.
2) Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
- To turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature in
your car audio system, go to
[SETUP] > [Phone] and [turn off]
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
feature.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection may become intermit-
tently disconnected in some mobile
phones. Follow these steps to try
again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try
again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
(Continued)
(Continued)
4) Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5) Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not be
displayed correctly.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• In some mobile phones, starting the
ignition while talking through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result in
the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your mobile
phone when starting the ignition.)
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to enter
Phone mode. Once a phone is paired
or connected, the guidance screen
will be displayed.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that
enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the car
audio system with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
allows the user to conveniently
make calls, receive calls, and
manage the phone book. Before
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, carefully read the
contents of this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negli-
gent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for pro-
longed periods of time is dan-
gerous and may lead to acci-
dents.
• When driving, view the screen
only for short periods of time.
NOTICE
Radio Mode
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3,
Type B-4)
Radio Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
(3) Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
(4) Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
(5) Auto store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
(6) RDS Menu
Displays the RDS Menu.
(7) RDS Info
Displays RDS broadcast information.
With the Radio Mode Button
Pressing the [RADIO] button will
change the operating mode in order
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟
AMA.
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within
[SETUP] [Display], then pressing
the [RADIO] button will display the
Radio Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
SEEK
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
play the previous/next frequency.
TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
4-72
Multimedia System
4-73
Multimedia System
4
Selecting/Saving Presets
Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons to play the
desired preset.
Press the [Preset] button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the [1] ~ [6] preset but-
tons to save the current frequency to
the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the [Auto store] button to auto-
matically save receivable frequen-
cies to Preset buttons.
While Auto Store is operating, press-
ing the [Auto store] button again will
cancel Auto Store and restore the
previous frequency.
RDS Menu
Press the [RDS Menu] button to set
the AF (Alternative Frequency),
Region and News features.
The RDS Menu is not supported
within AM or AMA mode.
Scan
Press the [TA/SCAN] button :
Previews each broadcast for 5 sec-
onds each
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing
and holding the [TA/SCAN] button
will cancel the scan operation.
TA (Traffic Announcement)
Press the [TA/SCAN] button to turn
the TA (Traffic Announcement) feature
On/Off.
4-74
Multimedia System
Radio Mode
(Type B-5, Type B-6)
Radio Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
(3) Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
(4) Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
(5) Auto store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
With the Radio Mode Button
Pressing the [RADIO] button will
change the operating mode in order
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM.
If [Mode Pop-up] is turned on within
[SETUP] [Display], then pressing
the [RADIO] button will display the
Radio Mode Pop-up screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
SEEK
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
play the previous/next frequency.
TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
Selecting /Saving Presets
Press the [Preset] button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
4-75
Multimedia System
4
Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons to play the
desired preset.
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the [1] ~ [6] preset but-
tons to save the current frequency to
the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the [Auto store] button to auto-
matically save receivable frequen-
cies to Preset buttons.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to preview
frequencies with superior reception
for 5 seconds each.
Press and hold the [SCAN] button to
preview presets for 5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing
the [SCAN] button will cancel the
scan operation.
Media Mode
Media Mode Screen
Pressing the [MEDIA] button will
change the operating mode in order
of CD ➟ USB(iPod
®
) ➟ AUX ➟ My
Music ➟ BT Audio.
If [Pop-up Mode] / [Mode Pop-up] is
turned on within [SETUP]
[Display], then pressing the [MEDIA]
button will display the Media Pop-up
Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
The media mode pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.
Mode Display on the Status Bar
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, iPod
®
, USB or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
®
USB
AUX
4-76
Multimedia System
MENU : Audio CD
Audio CD Mode Display
Controls
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion.
(3) Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
(4) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(5) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(6) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
(7) Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(9) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
■ Type B-5, Type B-6
■ Type B-1, Type B-2, Type B-3, Type B-4
4-77
Multimedia System
4
With the Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the [
II
] button to
pause and press [
] button to play.
Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track infor-
mation is included within the audio
CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next track.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
ton after the track has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
track from the beginning.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] button
before the track has been playing for 1
second will start the previous track.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current track.
Scan (With RDS)
Press and hold the [TA/SCAN] but-
ton to play the file 10 seconds of
each file.
Press and hold the [TA/SCAN] but-
ton again to turn off.
Scan (Without RDS)
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Press and hold the [SCAN] button
again to turn off.
4-78
Multimedia System
MENU : MP3 CD
MP3 CD Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the fold-
er name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion are recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
■ Type B-5, Type B-6
■ Type B-1, Type B-2, Type B-3, Type B-4
4-79
Multimedia System
4
(8) Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files
in Random(Shuffle) order.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
With the MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.
While playing, press the [
II
] button to
pause and press [
] button to play.
If there are numerous files and fold-
ers within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or
song searches may not operate.
Once loading is complete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
ton after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
ton before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
4-80
Multimedia System
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan (With RDS)
Press and hold the [TA/SCAN] button
to play the file 10 seconds of each file.
Press and hold the [TA/SCAN] button
again to turn off.
Scan (Without RDS)
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Press the [SCAN] button again to
turn off.
Searching Folders
Press the [FOLDER] button to select
and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing
.
4-81
Multimedia System
4
MENU : USB
USB Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the fold-
er name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion are recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
■ Type B-5, Type B-6
■ Type B-1, Type B-2, Type B-3, Type B-4
4-82
Multimedia System
(8) Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of
Random(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random
(Shuffle) All ➟ Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the
files in the current folder in ran-
dom(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files
in random(Shuffle) order.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
With the USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the [
II
] button to
pause and press [
] button to play.
Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and result in faulty list
display or file searching. Normal
operations will resume once loading
is complete.
The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memo-
ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
4-83
Multimedia System
4
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
tonafter the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
ton before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan (With RDS)
Press and hold the [TA/SCAN] but-
tonto play the file 10 seconds of each
file.
Press and hold the [TA/SCAN] but-
ton again to turn off.
Scan (Without RDS)
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Press the [SCAN] button again to
turn off.
Searching Folders
Press the [FOLDER] button to select
and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
4-84
Multimedia System
MENU : iPod
®
iPod
®
Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), dis-
plays the currently operating func-
tion.
(3) Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
(4) Song Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent song.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all
songs in Random(Shuffle) order.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
(9) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
■ Type B-5, Type B-6
■ Type B-1, Type B-2, Type B-3, Type B-4
4-85
Multimedia System
4
With the iPod
®
Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod
®
Songs
Once an iPod
®
is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod
®
song.
While playing, press the [
II
] button to
pause and press [
] button to play.
iPod
®
s with unsupported communi-
cation protocols may not properly
operate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next song.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
ton after the song has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
song from the beginning.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
ton before the song has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
song.
Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod
®
product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
Category Menu
(1) Displays the play screen.
(2) Moves to the iPod
®
root category
screen.
(3) Moves to the previous category.
If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod
®
device.
■ Type B-5, Type B-6
■ Type B-1, Type B-2, Type B-3, Type B-4
4-86
Multimedia System
MENU : AUX
AUX Mode Display Controls
Press the [MEDIA] button
Select
[AUX]
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
Car VCR, etc.) can be played
through a dedicated cable.
If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will be
restored.
AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (Camcorder,
Car VCR, etc.) has been connected.
The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not being
used, also remove the connector
jack.
When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
■ Type B-5, Type B-6
■ Type B-1, Type B-2, Type B-3, Type B-4
4-87
Multimedia System
4
MENU : My Music Mode
My Music Mode Display
Controls
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
(8) Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(10) Delete
Deletes the current file.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
■ Type B-5, Type B-6
■ Type B-1, Type B-2, Type B-3, Type B-4
4-88
Multimedia System
With the My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the [
II
] button to
pause and press [
] button to play.
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
ton after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [
SEEK TRACK
∨
] but-
ton before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search
for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
List Menu
(1) Moves to the previous screen.
(2) Selects all files.
(3) Deselects all selected files.
(4) Deletes selected files.
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the [Delete] button to
delete the selected files.
If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved. Identical
files cannot be copied more than
1,000 times.
To check memory information, go to
[SETUP]
[System]
[Memory
Information]
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
■ Type B-5, Type B-6
■ Type B-1, Type B-2, Type B-3, Type B-4
4-89
Multimedia System
4
Scan (With RDS)
Press and hold the [TA/SCAN] but-
ton to play the file 10 seconds of
each file.
Press and hold the [TA/SCAN] but-
ton again to turn off.
Scan (Without RDS)
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Press the [SCAN] button again to
turn off.
MENU :
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
Using Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start.
While playing, press the [
II
] button
to pause and press [
II
] button to
play.
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected,
press the [SETUP] button
[Phone]
button to display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology connection
screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone.
If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button
once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device after converting
to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
4-90
Multimedia System
Phone Mode
Making a call using the Steering
wheel controls
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) Mutes audio volume.
(2) Press the button to change audio
source.
(With RDS)
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟
AMA ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod
®
) ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
(Without RDS)
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ CD ➟
USB(iPod
®
) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music
➟ BT Audio.
(3) Used to control volume.
(4) When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history
screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming
call screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
When pressed and held
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree call, switches call back
to mobile phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on
the mobile phone, switches call
back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree (Operates
only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree is connect-
ed)
(5) Ends phone call
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3,
Type B-4)
When No Devices have been
Paired
➀ Press the [PHONE] button or the
[CALL] button on the steering
wheel controls. The following
screen is displayed.
➁ Press the [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
4-91
Multimedia System
4
• Device : Name of device as shown
when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
• Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
➂ From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
❈ SSP : Secure Simple Pairing
Non SSP supported device :
➃ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
SSP supported device :
➃ After a few moments, a screen is dis-
played 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
➄ Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
Some phones (i.e., iPhone
®
, Android
and Blackberry phones) may offer an
option to allow acceptance of all
future Bluetooth
®
connection requests
by default.” and “Visit http://www.
Hyundai.com/#/bluetooth for addition-
al information on pairing your
Bluetooth
®
-enabled mobile phone,
and to view a phone compatibility list.
Information
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
[PHONE] button or the [CALL] but-
ton on the steering wheel controls dis-
plays the following screen. Press the
[Pair] button to pair a new device or
press the [Connect] to connect a previ-
ously paired device.
i
4-92
Multimedia System
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the [SETUP] button
Select [Phone]
Pair Phone
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section “When
No Devices have been Paired” on the
previous page.
Information
• The waiting period during phone
pairing will last for one minute. The
pairing process will fail if the device
is not paired within the given time.
If the pairing process fails, you must
start the process from the begin-
ning.
• Generally, most Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices will
automatically connect once pairing
is complete. However, some devices
may require a separate verification
process to connect. Check to see
whether Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology has been properly con-
nected within your mobile phone.
• List of paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be viewed at
[SETUP]
[Phone]
[Paired
Phone List].
Paired Phone List
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
• Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected.
• Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected.
Connecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the [Connect](1) button.
i
4-93
Multimedia System
4
Disconnecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the [Disconnect](2) button.
Deleting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the [Delete](3) button.
Information
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and phone book
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Changing Priority
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The “Change Priority” feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones. However, the most
recently connected phone will always
be set as the highest priority.
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
[Change priority](4) button. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
When a device is currently connect-
ed, even if you change the priority to
a different device, the currently con-
nected phone will always be set as
the highest priority.
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the [PHONE] button to display the
Phone menu screen.
• Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls.
• Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen.
• Phone book : Displays the Phone
book list screen.
• Setup : Displays Phone related set-
tings.
i
4-94
Multimedia System
Information
• If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download call history
data.
• If you press the [Phone book] button
but there is no phone book data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download phone book
data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Calling by Dialing a Number
• Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number.
• Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered, switch-
es to call history screen.
• End : Deletes the entered phone
number.
• Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time.
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your phone book.
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number.
• Accept : Accepts the incoming call.
• Reject : Rejects the incoming call.
i
4-95
Multimedia System
4
Information
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
During a Handsfree Call
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your phone book.
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number.
• Call time : Displays the call time.
• End : Ends call.
• Private : Converts to Private mode.
• Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard
by the other party.
• Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off.
Information
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to
download the call history.
• Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history).
- Connects call upon selection.
• Download : Download Recent Call
History.
i
i
4-96
Multimedia System
Information
• The call history list will display up
to 50 outgoing, incoming, and
missed calls.
• Upon downloading call histories,
previously saved histories are delet-
ed.
• Incoming calls with hidden caller
IDs will not be saved in the call his-
tory list.
• Previously saved phone book entries
are stored even if a device is discon-
nected and re-connected.
• The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
Check to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device sup-
ports the download feature.
Phone Book
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the [Download]
button to download the call history.
• Contact List :
- Displays downloaded phone
book entries.
- Connects call upon selection.
• Download : Download phone book
entries.
Information
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can
be copied into car phone book.
• Upon downloading phone book
data, previously saved phone book
data will be deleted.
• Downloading is not possible if the
phone book download feature is
turned off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. Also,
some devices may require device
authorization upon attempting to
download. If downloading cannot be
normally conducted, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device setting or the screen state.
• Caller ID information will not be
displayed for unsaved callers.
• The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
Check to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device sup-
ports the download feature.
ii
4-97
Multimedia System
4
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(Type B-5, Type B-6)
When No Devices have been
Paired
➀ Press the [PHONE] button or the
[CALL] button on the steering
wheel controls. The following
screen is displayed.
➁ Press the [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
• Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
• Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
➂ From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
❈ SSP : Secure Simple Pairing
Non SSP supported device :
➃ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
SSP supported device :
➃ After a few moments, a screen is dis-
played 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
➄ Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
Some phones (i.e., iPhone
®
, Android
and Blackberry phones) may offer an
option to allow acceptance of all
future Bluetooth
®
connection requests
by default." and "Visit http://www.
Hyundai.com/#/bluetooth for addi-
tional information on pairing your
Bluetooth
®
-enabled mobile phone,
and to view a phone compatibility list.
4-98
Multimedia System
Information
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
[PHONE] button or the [CALL] but-
ton on the steering wheel controls dis-
plays the following screen. Press the
[Pair] button to pair a new device or
press the [Connect] to connect a previ-
ously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Phone]
Pair Phone
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section “When
No Devices have been Paired” on the
previous page.
Information
• The waiting period during phone
pairing will last for one minute. The
pairing process will fail if the device
is not paired within the given time.
If the pairing process fails, you must
start the process from the begin-
ning.
• Generally, most Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices will automati-
cally connect once pairing is com-
plete. However, some devices may
require a separate verification
process to connect. Check to see
whether Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
has been properly connected within
your mobile phone.
• List of paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be viewed at
[SETUP]
[Phone]
[Paired
Phone List].
ii
4-99
Multimedia System
4
Paired Phone List
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
• Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected.
• Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected.
Connecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the [Connect](1) button.
Disconnecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the [Disconnect](2) button.
Deleting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the [Delete](3) button.
Information
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Changing Priority
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The “Change Priority” feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones. However, the most
recently connected phone will always
be set as the highest priority.
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
[Change priority](4) button. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
When a device is currently connect-
ed, even if you change the priority to
a different device, the currently con-
nected phone will always be set as
the highest priority.
i
4-100
Multimedia System
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
[PHONE] button to display the
Phone menu screen.
• Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls.
• Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen.
• Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen.
• Setup : Displays Phone related set-
tings.
Information
• If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download call history
data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Calling by Dialing a Number
• Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number.
• Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered, switch-
es to call history screen.
• End : Deletes the entered phone
number.
• Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time.
i
4-101
Multimedia System
4
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts.
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number.
• Accept : Accepts the incoming call.
• Reject : Rejects the incoming call.
Information
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
During a Handsfree Call
• Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts.
• Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number.
• Call time : Displays the call time.
• End : Ends call.
• Private : Converts to Private mode.
• Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard
by the other party.
• Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off.
Information
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
i
i
4-102
Multimedia System
Call History
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to
download the call history.
• Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call histo-
ry).
- Connects call upon selection.
• Download : Download Recent Call
History.
Contacts
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the [Download]
button to download the call history.
• Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries.
- Connects call upon selection.
• Download : Download contacts
entries.
Information
• Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be
copied into car contacts.
• Upon downloading contacts data,
previously saved contacts data will
be deleted.
• Downloading is not possible if the
contacts download feature is turned
off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device. Also, some
devices may require device authori-
zation upon attempting to down-
load. If downloading cannot be nor-
mally conducted, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device setting or the screen state.
• Caller ID information will not be
displayed for unsaved callers.
• The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
Check to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device sup-
ports the download feature.
i
4-103
Multimedia System
4
Setup Mode
(Type B-1, Type B-2,Type B-3,
Type B-4)
Press the [SETUP] button to display
the Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound], [Clock/
Day], [Phone] and [System].
With the Display Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Display]
You can select and control options
related to [Brightness], [Pop-up
Mode], [Scroll text] and [Song Info].
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Day or
Night mode.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
• Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically.
• Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high.
• Night : Always maintains the bright-
ness on low.
4-104
Multimedia System
Pop-up Mode
This feature is used to display the
Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the [RADIO] or [MEDIA]
button will display the Pop-up Mode
screen.
Information
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
Scroll Text
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too
long to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeat-
edly scrolled. When turned off, the
text is scrolled just once.
Song Info
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
• Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name.
• Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song.
i
4-105
Multimedia System
4
With the Sound Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Sound]
You can select and control options
related to [Audio Settings], [Speed
Dependent Vol.] and [Touch Screen
Beep].
Audio Settings
Use the [Up/Down/Left/Right] but-
tons to adjust the Fader/Balance set-
tings.
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
Touch Screen Beep
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
4-106
Multimedia System
With the Clock/Day Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Clock/Day]
You can select and control options
related to [Clock Settings], [Day
Settings], [Time Format], [Clock
Display(Power off)] and [Automatic
RDS Time].
Clock Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
Press and hold the [CLOCK] button
to display the Clock/Day screen.
Day Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Day, Month and Year setting.
Time Format
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display (Power Off)
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
Automatic RDS Time
This feature is used to set time auto-
matically by synchronizing with RDS.
4-107
Multimedia System
4
With the Phone Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Phone]
You can select and control options
related to [Pair Phone], [Paired
Phone List], [Phone book
Download], [Auto Download],
[Outgoing Volume] and [Bluetooth
System Off].
Pairing a New Device
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
(1) Moves to the previous screen.
(2) Connect/Disconnects currently select-
ed phone.
(3) Deletes the currently selected
phone.
(4) Sets currently selected phone to
highest connection priority.
Information
- Before Downloading Phone
Books
• Only phone books within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports phone book
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The Phone book for only the con-
nected phone can be downloaded.
Before downloading, check to see
whether your phone supports the
download feature.
i
4-108
Multimedia System
Downloading Phone books
As the Phone book is downloaded
from the mobile phone, downloading
Phone book number is displayed.
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries
can be copied into car phone book.
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries
can be saved for each paired
device.
• Upon downloading phone book
data, previously saved phone book
data will be deleted. However,
Phone book entries saved to other
paired phones are not deleted.
Auto Download (Phone Book)
This feature is used to automatically
download mobile phone book entries
once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected.
• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile phone book
entries every time the phone is
connected. The download time
may differ depending on the num-
ber of saved phone book entries
and the communication state.
• When downloading a phone book,
first check to see that your mobile
phone supports the phone book
download feature.
Outgoing Volume
Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
4-109
Multimedia System
4
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
To turn
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
back on, go to [SETUP]
[Phone]
and press “Yes”.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming may not be sup-
ported in some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phones.
With the System Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[System]
You can select and control options
related to [Memory Information] and
[Language].
Memory Information
This feature displays information relat-
ed to system memory.
• Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
• Capacity : Displays total capacity
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.
Language
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
If the language is changed, the sys-
tem will restart and apply the select-
ed language.
• Language support by region
NOTICE
4-110
Multimedia System
Setup Mode
(Type B-5, Type B-6)
Press the [SETUP] button to display
the Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound],
[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and
[System].
With the Display Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Display]
You can select and control options
related to [Brightness], [Mode Pop
up], [Text Scroll] and [Media Display].
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Day or
Night mode.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
• Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically.
• Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high.
• Night : Always maintains the bright-
ness on low.
4-111
Multimedia System
4
Mode Pop up
This feature is used to display the
Mode Pop up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the [RADIO] or [MEDIA]
button will display the Mode Pop up
screen.
Information
The media Mode Pop up screen can be
displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
Text Scroll
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too
long to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeat-
edly scrolled. When turned off, the
text is scrolled just once.
Media Display
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
• Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name.
• Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song.
i
4-112
Multimedia System
With the Sound Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Sound]
You can select and control options
related to [Sound Setting], [Speed
Dependent Vol.] and [Touch Screen
Beep].
Sound Setting
Use the [Up/Down/Left/Right] but-
tons to adjust the Fader/Balance set-
tings.
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
Touch Screen Beep
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
4-113
Multimedia System
4
With the Clock/Calendar Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Clock/Calendar]
You can select and control options
related to [Clock Settings], [Calendar
Settings] and [Clock Display(Power
off)].
Clock Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
Press and hold the [CLOCK] button
to display the Clock/Calendar screen.
Calendar Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Year, Month and Day setting.
Clock Display(Power off)
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
4-114
Multimedia System
With the Phone Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[Phone]
You can select and control options
related to [Pair Phone], [Paired
Phone List], [Contacts Download],
[Auto Download], [Outgoing Volume]
and [Bluetooth System Off].
Pairing a New Device
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Connection” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
(1) Moves to the previous screen.
(2) Connect/disconnects currently
selected phone.
(3) Deletes the currently selected
phone.
(4) Sets currently selected phone to
highest connection priority.
4-115
Multimedia System
4
Information
- Before Downloading
Contacts
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, downloading
contacts number is displayed.
• Up to 1,000 contacts entries can
be copied into car contacts.
• Up to 1,000 contacts entries can
be saved for each paired device.
• Upon downloading contacts data,
previously saved contacts data will
be deleted. However, contacts
entries saved to other paired
phones are not deleted.
Auto Download (Contacts)
T
his feature is used to automatically
download mobile contacts entries once
a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected.
• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile contacts entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
contacts entries and the communi-
cation state.
• When downloading a contacts, first
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the contacts
download feature.
i
4-116
Multimedia System
Outgoing Volume
Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
To turn
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to [SETUP]
[Phone] and press “Yes”.
With the System Button
Press the [SETUP] button
Select
[System]
You can select and control options
related to [Memory Information] and
[Language].
Memory Information
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
• Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
• Capacity : Displays total capacity
Language
This feature is used to change the
system language.
If the language is changed, the sys-
tem will restart and apply the select-
ed language.
• Language support by region.
English, Português, Español.
4-117
Multimedia System
4
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-
evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one or more of the following measures :
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution : Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void
your authority to operate this equipment.
Declaration of Conformity
4-118
Multimedia System
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operatedwith minmum 20cm between the and your body. This transmitter must
not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the
FCC.
4-119
Multimedia System
4
CE for EU
4-120
Multimedia System
4-121
Multimedia System
4
NCC for Taiwan
4-122
Multimedia System
ACMA for Australia
4-123
Multimedia System
4
4-124
Multimedia System
ANATEL for Brazil
4-125
Multimedia System
4
4-126
Multimedia System
4-127
Multimedia System
4
SMA for Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by Jamaica : SMA-AM210F2GN
This product has been Type Approved by Jamaica : SMA-AM110F2GN
This product has been Type Approved by Jamaica : SMA-AC110F2GN
4-128
Multimedia System
IFETEL for Mexico
<IFETEL Operation Guide>
“La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones :
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la
que pueda causar su operación no deseada.”
4-129
Multimedia System
4
MOC for Israel
Driving your vehicle
Before driving.........................................................5-4
Before entering the vehicle ...........................................5-4
Before starting...................................................................5-4
Ignition switch ........................................................5-5
Key ignition switch............................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button..............................................5-11
Manual transmission............................................5-20
Manual transmission operation ...................................5-20
Good driving practices...................................................5-22
Automatic transmission.......................................5-24
Automatic transmission operation ..............................5-24
Parking...............................................................................5-29
Good driving practices...................................................5-29
Dual clutch transmission.....................................5-31
Dual clutch transmission operation............................5-31
Parking...............................................................................5-39
Good driving practices...................................................5-39
Braking system.....................................................5-41
Power brakes ...................................................................5-41
Disc brakes wear indicator...........................................5-42
Rear drum brakes ...........................................................5-42
Parking brake...................................................................5-42
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-45
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-47
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-50
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC).....................................5-52
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) ......................................5-52
Good braking practices..................................................5-53
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system...........................5-54
To activate the ISG system...........................................5-54
To deactivate the ISG system ......................................5-57
ISG system malfunction.................................................5-57
The battery sensor deactivation.................................5-59
Drive mode integrated control system .............5-60
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) ..................5-62
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-63
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-66
Limitations of the system .............................................5-69
Cruise control .......................................................5-71
Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-71
Special driving conditions...................................5-78
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-78
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-78
Smooth cornering ...........................................................5-79
Driving at night................................................................5-79
Driving in the rain ...........................................................5-79
Driving in flooded areas................................................5-80
Highway driving...............................................................5-80
5
5
Winter driving.......................................................5-81
Snow or icy conditions ..................................................5-81
Winter Precautions.........................................................5-83
Trailer towing .......................................................5-86
If you decide to pull a trailer.......................................5-87
Trailer towing equipment ..............................................5-91
Driving with a trailer ......................................................5-92
Maintenance when towing a trailer ...........................5-96
Vehicle weight ......................................................5-97
Overloading.......................................................................5-97
5-3
Driving your vehicle
5
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only
long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the trunk open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
WARNING
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle
• Be sure all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Before starting
• Make sure the hood, the trunk, and
the doors are securely closed and
locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the mes-
sages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are car-
rying are stored properly or fas-
tened down securely.
BEFORE DRIVING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be prop-
erly belted whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. For more infor-
mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or pedes-
trians may be careless and
make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of
you.
WARNING
5-5
Driving your vehicle
5
NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and
driving is dangerous and may
result in an accident and SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reac-
tion time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
You are much more likely to have
a serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive. If you are
drinking or taking drugs, don't
drive. Do not ride with a driver
who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driv-
er or call a taxi.
IGNITION SWITCH
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the igni-
tion switch or related parts.
Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the ignition
switch, or any other control,
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area may cause a
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
5-6
Driving your vehicle
Key ignition switch
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ignition switch will illuminate, pro-
vided the ignition switch is not in the
ON position. The light will go off
immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed. (if
equipped)
OYF059016
• NEVER turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK or ACC position
while the vehicle is in motion
except in an emergency. This
will result in the engine turning
off and loss of power assist for
the steering and brake sys-
tems. This may lead to loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause
an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in 1
st
gear (for
manual transmission vehicle)
or P (Park, for automatic trans-
mission/dual clutch transmis-
sion vehicle) position, apply
the parking brake, and turn
ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
Unexpected vehicle move-
ment may occur if these pre-
cautions are not followed.
OAD055082L
5-7
Driving your vehicle
5
Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Position
Action Notes
LOCK
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, put the key in at
the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK position.
The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.
(if equipped)
ACC
Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition
switch to the ACC position, turn the key
while turning the steering wheel right and
left to release tension.
ON
This is the normal key position when the engine has started.
All features and accessories are usable.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition
switch from ACC to ON.
Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON
position when the engine is not running to
prevent the battery from discharging.
START
To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START position.
The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.
The engine will crank until you release the
key.
5-8
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
Starting the gasoline engine
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-
tral.
3. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
als.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
Vehicle with automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
• Always wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,
such as high heels, ski boots,
sandals, flip-flops, etc., may
interfere with your ability to
use the brake, accelerator and
clutch pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may sud-
denly move if the brake padel
is released when the rpm is
high.
WARNING
5-9
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
• It is best to maintain a moderate
engine speed until the vehicle engine
comes up to normal operating tem-
perature. Avoid harsh or abrupt
acceleration or deceleration while
the engine is still cold.
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heat-
ed before starting the engine and
then have to be warmed up before
starting to drive.
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-
tral.
3. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
als.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position to pre-heat the engine.
The glow indicator light ( ) will
illuminate.
5. When the glow indicator light ( )
goes out, turn the key ignition
switch to the START position. Hold
the key (maximum of 10 seconds)
until the engine starts and release
it.
Vehicle with dual clutch transmis-
sion:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position to pre-heat the engine.
The glow indicator light ( ) will
illuminate.
5. When the glow indicator light ( )
goes out, turn the key ignition
switch to the START position. Hold
the key (maximum of 10 seconds)
until the engine starts and release
it.
If the engine does not start within
10 seconds after preheating is
completed, turn the ignition
switch once more to the LOCK
position and wait for 10 seconds.
Then turn the ignition switch to
the ON position in order to pre-
heat the engine again.
NOTICE
i
5-10
Driving your vehicle
Starting and stopping the engine
for turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting
the engine.
If the engine is cold, idle for sever-
al seconds before sufficient lubri-
cation is ensured in the turbo
charger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driv-
ing that requires heavy engine load,
idle the engine about 1 minute
before turning the engine off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
Do not turn off the engine immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or
turbo charger unit.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• Do not hold the ignition key in
the START position for more
than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
seconds before trying again.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
• If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and turn the ignition switch to
the START position in an attempt
to restart the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
NOTICENOTICE
5-11
Driving your vehicle
5
Engine Start/Stop button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-
minate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed. (if equipped)
To turn the engine off in an
emergency:
Press and hold the Engine Start/
Stop button for more than two
seconds OR rapidly press and
release the Engine Start/Stop
button three times (within three
seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
• NEVER press the Engine Start/
Stop button while the vehicle
is in motion except in an emer-
gency. This will result in the
engine turning off and loss of
power assist for the steering
and brake systems. This may
lead to loss of directional con-
trol and braking function,
which could cause an acci-
dent.
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, press the Engine Start/
Stop button to the OFF posi-
tion, and take the Smart Key
with you. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
WARNING
OAD055001
5-12
Driving your vehicle
Engine Stop/Start button positions
- Vehicle with manual transmission
Button Position Action Notes
OFF
To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and
then press the Engine Start/Stop button.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehi-
cle from theft. (if equipped)
If the steering wheel is not locked properly
when you open the driver's door, the warning
chime will sound.
Not illuminated
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ACC position for more than one hour, the
battery power will turn off automatically to
prevent the battery from discharging.
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly,
the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while
turning the steering wheel right and left to
release tension.
Orange indicator
5-13
Driving your vehicle
5
- Vehicle with manual transmission
Button Position Action Notes
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the clutch pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the engine is not run-
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
Blue indicator
START
To start the engine, depress the clutch and
brake pedals and press the Engine Start/
Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal, the
engine does not start and the Engine
Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF
→
ACC
→
ON
→
OFF or ACC
Not illuminated
5-14
Driving your vehicle
Engine Stop/Start button positions
- Vehicle with automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission
Button Position Action Notes
OFF
To turn off the engine, press the Engine
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the
Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to
the OFF position, but turns to the ACC posi-
tion.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehi-
cle from theft. (if equipped)
If the steering wheel is not locked properly
when you open the driver's door, the warning
chime will sound.
Not illuminated
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ACC position for more than one hour, the
battery power will turn off automatically to
prevent the battery from discharging.
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly,
the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while
turning the steering wheel right and left to
release tension.
Orange indicator
5-15
Driving your vehicle
5
- Vehicle with automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission
Button Position Action Notes
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the engine is not run-
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
Blue indicator
START
To start the engine, depress the brake pedal
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N
(Neutral) position.
For your safety, start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without depressing the brake pedal, the
engine does not start and the Engine
Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF
→
ACC
→
ON
→
OFF or ACC
Not illuminated
5-16
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
Information
• The engine will start by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from the driver,
the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any
door is open, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is not
in the vehicle, the " " indicator
will blink and the warning "Key not
in vehicle" will come on, and if all
doors are closed, the chime will also
sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle when using
the ACC position or if the vehicle
engine is ON.
Starting the gasoline engine
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-
tral.
4. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
als.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
Vehicle with automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5 Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
i
• Always wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,
such as high heels, ski boots,
sandals, flip-flops, etc., may
interfere with your ability to
use the brake, accelerator and
clutch pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may sud-
denly move if the brake pedal
is released when the rpm is
high.
WARNING
5-17
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
• It is best to maintain a moderate
engine speed until the vehicle engine
comes up to normal operating tem-
perature. Avoid harsh or abrupt
acceleration or deceleration while
the engine is still cold.
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heat-
ed before starting the engine and
then have to be warmed up before
starting to drive.
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-
tral.
4. Depress the clutch and brake
pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
6. Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the glow indicator light
( ) goes out.
7. When the glow indicator light ( )
goes out, the engine will start.
Vehicle with dual clutch transmis-
sion:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
6. Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the glow indicator light
( ) goes out.
7. When the glow indicator light ( )
goes out, the engine will start.
If the Engine Start/Stop button is
pressed while the engine is pre-
heating, the engine may start.
NOTICE
i
5-18
Driving your vehicle
Starting and stopping the engine
for turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting
the engine.
If the engine is cold, idle for sever-
al seconds before sufficient lubri-
cation is ensured in the turbo
charger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driv-
ing that requires heavy engine
load, idle the engine about 1
minute before turning the engine
off. This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
Do not turn off the engine immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or
turbo charger unit.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
Do not press the Engine Start/
Stop button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp
fuse is blown.
When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normal-
ly. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If you are not able to replace
the fuse, you can start the engine
by pressing and holding the
Engine Start/Stop button for 10
seconds with the Engine Start/
Stop button in the ACC position.
For your safety always depress the
brake and/or clutch pedal before
starting the engine.
NOTICENOTICE
NOTICE
5-19
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
If the smart key battery is weak or the
smart key does not work correctly,
you can start the engine by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key in the direction of the pic-
ture above.
i
OAD055002L
5-20
Driving your vehicle
Manual transmission opera-
tion
The manual transmission has 6 for-
ward gears. The transmission is fully
synchronized in all forward gears so
shifting to either a higher or a lower
gear is easily accomplished.
To shift to R (Reverse), make sure
the vehicle has completely stopped,
and then move the shift lever to neu-
tral before moving into R (Reverse).
When you've come to a complete
stop and it's hard to shift into 1
st
gear
or R (Reverse):
1. Put the shift lever in neutral and
release the clutch pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal, and
then shift into first or R (Reverse)
gear.
Information
During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transmission lubri-
cant has warmed up.
i
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in 1
st
gear when the vehicle is
parked on a uphill and in R
(Reverse) on a downhill, set the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
WARNING
OAD055004
The shift lever can be moved without
pressing the button (1).
The button (1) must be pressed while
moving the shift lever.
5-21
Driving your vehicle
5
Using the clutch
The clutch pedal should be
depressed all the way before:
- Starting the engine
The engine will not start without
depressing the clutch pedal.
- Shifting into gear, up shifting to the
next higher gear, or down shifting
to the next low gear.
When releasing the clutch pedal,
release it slowly. The clutch pedal
should always be released while
driving.
To prevent unnecessary wear or
damage to the clutch:
• Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving.
• Do not hold the vehicle with the
clutch on an incline, while wait-
ing for the traffic light, etc.
• Always depress the clutch pedal
down fully to prevent noise or
damage.
• Do not start with the 2
nd
(sec-
ond) gear engaged except when
you start on a slippery road.
Downshifting
Down shift to a lower gear when
slowing down in heavy traffic or driv-
ing up a steep hill to prevent high
engine loads.
Also, downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling help reaccelerate
the vehicle when you need to
increase your speed.
When the vehicle is going downhill,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed by providing brake power from
the engine and results in less wear
on the brakes.
NOTICE
5-22
Driving your vehicle
To prevent damage to the engine,
clutch and transmission:
• When downshifting from 5
th
gear
to 4
th
gear, be careful not to inad-
vertently push the shift lever
sideways engaging the 2
nd
gear.
A drastic downshift may cause
the engine speed to increase to
the point the tachometer will
enter the red-zone and may
cause engine damage.
• Do not downshift more than two
gear at a time or downshift the
gear when the engine is running
at high speed (5,000 RPM or
higher). Such downshifting may
damage the engine, clutch and
the transmission.
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely dangerous.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause the brakes and related parts
to overheat and malfunction.
When you are driving down a long
hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. Engine braking will help slow
down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you shift into R
(Reverse) to prevent damage to
the transmission.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident
NOTICE
Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a higher gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads. The vehicle may slip
causing an accident.
WARNING
5-23
Driving your vehicle
5
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
5-24
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
OAD055005/OAD055005R
The shift lever can freely operate.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Manual shift mode
Manual shift mode
■ Left-hand drive ■ Right-hand drive
Automatic transmission operation
The automatic transmission has six forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.
5-25
Driving your vehicle
5
Shift lever position
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above
and still cannot shift the lever out of
P (Park), see "Shift-Lock Release"
in this chapter.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• When using Manual Shift
Mode, do not use engine brak-
ing (shifting from a high gear
to lower gear) rapidly on slip-
pery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
WARNING
5-26
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a 6-gear sequence, pro-
viding the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill, depress
the accelerator fully. The transmis-
sion will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear (or gears, as
appropriate).
The DRIVE MODE switch, located on
the shift lever console, allows the driv-
er to switch from NORMAL mode to
ECO or SPORT mode. (if equipped)
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.
NOTICE
Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.
WARNING
5-27
Driving your vehicle
5
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In manual shift mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Information
• Only the six forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1
st
gear is automat-
ically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+ (Up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2
nd
gear which is better for smooth driv-
ing on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the - (Down) side to shift
back to the 1
st
gear.
• When driving in manual shift mode,
slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged if the engine rpms
are outside of the allowable range.
i
OAD055006
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
5-28
Driving your vehicle
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, and then do the follow-
ing:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Push the shift-lock release button.
4. Move the shift lever while pushing
the shift-lock release button.
5. Stop pushing the shift-lock release
button.
6. Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock access hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever while holding
down the screwdriver.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock
release access hole then install
the cap.
7. Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the engine.
OAD055007
■ Type A
OAD055084L
■ Type B
5-29
Driving your vehicle
5
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-30
Driving your vehicle
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmis-
sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-31
Driving your vehicle
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
5
OAD055005/OAD055005R
The shift lever can freely operate.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Manual shift mode
Manual shift mode
■ Left-hand drive ■ Right-hand drive
Dual clutch transmission operation
The dual clutch transmission has seven forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.
5-32
• The dual clutch transmission gives
the driving feel of a manual trans-
mission, yet provides the ease of a
fully automatic transmission. Unlike
a traditional automatic transmis-
sion, the gear shifting can some-
times be felt and heard on the dual
clutch transmission, as the actua-
tors engage the clutch and the
gear is selected.
The dual clutch transmission can
be thought of as an automatically
shifting manual transmission.
When D (Drive) is selected, the
transmission will automatically shift
through the gears similar to a con-
ventional automatic transmission.
• The dual clutch transmission incor-
porates a dry-type dual clutch
mechanism, which allows for better
acceleration performance and
increased fuel efficiency while driv-
ing. But it differs from a conven-
tional automatic transmission in
that it does not incorporate a
torque converter. Instead, the tran-
sition from one gear to the next is
managed by clutch slip, especially
at lower speeds. As a result, shifts
are sometimes more noticeable,
and a light vibration can be felt as
the transmission shaft speed is
matched with the engine shaft
speed. This is a normal condition of
the dual clutch transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque more directly and provides
a direct-drive feeling which may
feel different from a conventional
automatic transmission. This may
be more noticeable when launch-
ing the vehicle from a stop or when
traveling at low, stop-and-go vehi-
cle speeds.
Driving your vehicle
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slip-
pery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
WARNING
5-33
Driving your vehicle
• When rapidly accelerating from a
lower vehicle speed, the engine
rpm may increase dramatically as
a result of clutch slip as the dual
clutch transmission selects the cor-
rect gear. This is a normal condi-
tion.
• When accelerating from a stop on
an incline, press the accelerator
smoothly and gradually to avoid
any shudder feeling or jerkiness.
• When traveling at a lower vehicle
speed, if you release the accelera-
tor pedal quickly, you may feel
engine braking before the trans-
mission changes gears. This
engine braking feeling is similar to
operating a manual transmission at
low speed.
• When driving downhill, you may
wish to move the gear shift lever to
Manual Shift mode and downshift
to a lower gear in order to control
your speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a self
test. This is a normal sound for the
dual clutch transmission.
• To hold the vehicle on a hill use
the foot brake or the parking
brake. If the vehicle is held by
applying the accelerator pedal
on a hill the clutch and trans-
mission will be overheated
resulting in damage.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display
and you may feel a vibration.
(Continued)
NOTICE
5
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTLE055019/OTLE055018
5-34
(Continued)
• If the clutch becomes overheat-
ed by excessive use of the
clutch to hold on a hill, you may
notice a shudder feeling and a
blinking display on the instru-
ment cluster. When this occurs,
the clutch is disabled until the
clutch cools to normal tempera-
tures. If this occurs, pull over to
a safe location, shift into P
(Park) and apply the foot brake
for a few minutes.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead
to damage to the transmission.
• If the display continues to blink,
for your safety, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Under certain conditions, such
as repeated stop-and-go launch-
es on steep grades, the trans-
mission clutches may overheat.
When the clutches are overheat-
ed, the transmission safe pro-
tection mode logic is enabled.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the safe protection mode logic
is enabled, the gear position
indicator on the cluster blinks
with a chime sound. At this time,
a warning message will appear
on the LCD display and driving
may not be smooth.
If you ignore this warning, the
driving condition may become
worse. To return the normal driv-
ing condition, stop the vehicle
and apply the foot brake for a
few minutes before driving off.
• Gear shifts may be more notice-
able than a conventional auto-
matic transmission. This is a
normal characteristic of this
type of dual clutch transmis-
sion.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTLE055022/OTLE055023
OTLE055026/OTLE055027
5-35
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• During the first 1,500 km (1,000
miles), you may feel that the
vehicle may not be smooth
when accelerating at low speed.
During this break-in period, the
shift quality and performance of
your new vehicle is continuous-
ly optimized.
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
Shift lever position
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above
and still cannot shift the lever out
of P (Park), see "Shift-Lock
Release" in this chapter.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
5
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
WARNING
5-36
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a 7-gear sequence, pro-
viding the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill, depress
the accelerator fully. The transmis-
sion will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear (or gears, as
appropriate).
The DRIVE MODE switch, located on
the shift lever console, allows the driv-
er to switch from NORMAL mode to
ECO or SPORT mode. (if equipped)
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In manual shift mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
NOTICE
Driving your vehicle
OAD055006
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
5-37
Driving your vehicle
Information
• Only the seven forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1
st
gear is automat-
ically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+ (Up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2
nd
gear which is better for smooth driv-
ing on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the - (Down) side to shift
back to the 1
st
gear.
• When driving in manual shift mode,
slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged if the engine rpms
are outside of the allowable range.
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the dual clutch trans-
mission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, and then do the follow-
ing:
i
5
5-38
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Push the shift-lock release button.
4. Move the shift lever while pushing
the shift-lock release button.
5. Stop pushing the shift-lock release
button.
6. Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock access hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever while holding
down the screwdriver.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock
release access hole then install
the cap.
7. Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
Driving your vehicle
OAD055007
■ Type A
OAD055084L
■ Type B
5-39
Driving your vehicle
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmis-
sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
5
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-40
Driving your vehicle
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
WARNING
5-41
Driving your vehicle
5
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
You can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
BRAKING SYSTEM
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending down a
long or steep hill, move the
shift lever to Manual Shift
mode and manually downshift
to a lower gear in order to
control your speed without
using the brake pedal exces-
sively. Applying the brakes
continuously will cause the
brakes to overheat and could
result in a temporary loss of
braking performance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle's ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep
water. To dry the brakes, light-
ly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintain-
ing a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes func-
tion correctly.
WARNING
5-42
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high pitched warning sound from
your front or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Note that some driving conditions or
climates may cause a brake squeal
when you first apply (or lightly apply)
the brakes. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
Information
Always replace brake pads as com-
plete front or rear axle sets.
Rear drum brakes
(if equipped)
Your rear drum brakes do not have
wear indicators. Therefore, have the
rear brake linings inspected if you
hear a rear brake rubbing noise. Also
have your rear brakes inspected
each time you change or rotate your
tires and when you have the front
brakes replaced.
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
Always set the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle, to apply:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Pull up the parking brake lever as far
as possible.
i
NOTICE
OAD055008
5-43
Driving your vehicle
5
Releasing the parking brake
To release:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
While pressing the release button
(1), slightly pull up on the parking
brake lever then lower the parking
brake lever (2).
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the 1
st
gear
(for manual transmission vehi-
cle) or P (Park, for automatic
transmission/dual clutch trans-
mission vehicle) position, then
apply the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING
OAD055009
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-
ate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.
WARNING
5-44
Driving your vehicle
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the park-
ing brake engaged, warning will
sound. Damage to the parking
brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the braking system
and cause premature wear or
damage to brake parts. Make sure
the parking brake is released and
the Brake Warning Light is off
before driving.
Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the ignition
switch to the ON posi-
tion (do not start the
engine).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON posi-
tion.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while engine is running,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.
NOTICE
5-45
Driving your vehicle
5
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.
Using ABS
To obtain the maximum benefit from
your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ABS is
active.
ABS does not reduce the time or dis-
tance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from sudden changes in
direction, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather con-
ditions.
(Continued)
• On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering. This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehi-
cle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for cars
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-46
Driving your vehicle
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-
ty. Always steer moderately when
braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-
ing wheel movement can still cause
your vehicle to veer into oncoming
traffic or off the road.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake sys-
tem may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
The ABS warning light ( ) will stay
on for several seconds after the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON
position. During that time, the ABS
will go through self-diagnosis and the
light will go off if everything is nor-
mal. If the light stays on, you may
have a problem with your ABS. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and apply your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light ( ) may illuminate. Pull
your car over to a safe place and
turn the engine off.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with your ABS system. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Information
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the ABS
warning light ( ) may turn on at the
same time. This happens because of
the low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS is malfunctioning.
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
i
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light ( ) is
on and stays on, you may have
a problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normal-
ly. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, we recommend
that you contact your HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
5-47
Driving your vehicle
5
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) (if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle’s brakes
and intervenes in the engine man-
agement system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for approxi-
mately three seconds. After both
lights go off, the ESC is enabled.
OAD055010
OAD055010R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers, and hydroplaning
on wet surfaces can result in
severe accidents.
WARNING
5-48
Driving your vehicle
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks:
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ESC is
active.
• When the ESC activates, the
engine may not respond to the
accelerator as it does under routine
conditions.
• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the Cruise
Control automatically disengages.
The Cruise Control can be reen-
gaged when the road conditions
allow. See "Cruise Control System"
later in this chapter. (if equipped)
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine rpm (revolutions per minute)
may not increase even if you press
the accelerator pedal deeply. This is
to maintain the stability and traction
of the vehicle and does not indicate
a problem.
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button briefly.
The ESC OFF indicator light and
message (vehicles equipped with a
supervision cluster) will illuminate. In
this state, the traction control func-
tion of ESC (engine management) is
disabled, but the brake control func-
tion of ESC (braking management)
still operates.
• State 2
Press and hold the ESC OFF button
continuously for more than 3 sec-
onds. The ESC OFF indicator light
and message (vehicles equipped
with a supervision cluster) illumi-
nates and a warning chime sounds.
In this state, both the traction control
function of ESC (engine manage-
ment) and the brake control function
of ESC (braking management) are
disabled.
If the ignition switch is placed to the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
ESC remains off. Upon restarting the
engine, the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OLF054439N/OLF054101N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTLE055030/OTLE055140
5-49
Driving your vehicle
5
Indicator lights
When the ignition switch is pressed
to the ON position, the ESC indicator
light illuminates, then goes off if the
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates we recommend that
the vehicle be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized wheels and tires
installed.
ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
NOTICE
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER attempt
to accelerate. NEVER turn the
ESC off while the ESC indicator
light is blinking or you may lose
control of the vehicle resulting in
an accident.
WARNING
5-50
Driving your vehicle
To prevent damage to the trans-
mission:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while
the ESC, ABS, and parking brake
warning lights are displayed.
The repairs would not be cov-
ered by the vehicle warranty.
Reduce engine power and do
not spin the wheel(s) excessive-
ly while these lights are dis-
played.
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, make sure the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated).
Information
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or standard brake system opera-
tion.
Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM) (if equipped)
The Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM) is a function of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system. It
helps ensure the vehicle stays stable
when accelerating or braking sud-
denly on wet, slippery and rough
roads where traction over the four
tires can suddenly become uneven.
VSM operation
VSM ON condition
The VSM operates when:
• The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 15 km/h (9 mph) on curve
roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 20 km/h (12 mph) when the
vehicle is braking on rough roads.
When operating
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may activate the
ESC, you may hear sounds from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-
sation in the brake pedal. This is nor-
mal and it means your VSM is active.
i
NOTICE
Take the following precautions
when using the Vehicle Stability
Management (VSM):
• ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. The VSM is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving prac-
tices.
• Never drive too fast for the
road conditions.The VSM sys-
tem will not prevent acci-
dents. Excessive speed in bad
weather, slippery and uneven
roads can result in severe
accidents.
WARNING
5-51
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on a banked road such as
gradient or incline
• Driving rearward.
• ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• EPS (Electric Power Steering) warn-
ing light ( ) is on.
VSM OFF condition
To cancel VSM operation, press the
ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) will illuminate.
To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF
button again. The ESC OFF indicator
light will go out.
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized tires and wheels
installed.
NOTICE
i
If ESC indicator light ( ) or
EPS warning light ( ) stays
on, your vehicle may have a
malfunction with the VSM sys-
tem. When the warning light illu-
minates we recommend that the
vehicle be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
5-52
Driving your vehicle
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
(if equipped)
helps prevent has the tendency to
slide backwards on a steep slope,
before depressing the accelerator
after a stop. The HAC prevents the
vehicle from sliding backwards and
releases the brake after 2 seconds or
when the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Information
• The HAC does not operate when the
shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
• The HAC activates even when the
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is
off. However, it does not activate,
when the ESC does not normally
operate.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
(if equipped)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking
the stop lights, while sharply and
severely braking.
The system is activated when:
• The vehicle suddenly stops. (The
deceleration power exceeds 7 m/s
2
,
and the driving speed exceeds 55
km/h (34 mph).)
• The ABS is activated.
The hazard warning flasher automat-
ically turns ON after blinking the stop
lights, when the driving speeds is
decelerated under 40 km/h (25 mph),
when the ABS is deactivated, and
when the sudden braking situation is
over.
i
The HAC is activated only for
about 2 seconds, so always
depress the accelerator pedal
to begin driving upwards after a
stop.
WARNING
5-53
Driving your vehicle
5
The hazard warning flasher turns
OFF, when the driving speed exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph) after a complete
stop. The hazard warning flasher
turns OFF, when the vehicle drives at
a low speed for a certain period of
time. The driver can manually turn
OFF the hazard warning flasher by
pressing the button.
Information
The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) sys-
tem will not work if the hazard warn-
ing flasher already blinks.
Good braking practices
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed. Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and we recommend that you
call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling for-
ward.
i
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a com-
plete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the Engine
Start/Stop button in the OFF
position.
Vehicles parked with the park-
ing brake not applied or not
fully engaged may roll inadver-
tently and may cause injury to
the driver and others. ALWAYS
apply the parking brake before
exiting the vehicle.
WARNING
5-54
The ISG system is to reduce the fuel
consumption by automatically shut-
ting down the engine, when the vehi-
cle is at a standstill (i.e. red stop light,
stop sign, and traffic jam).
The engine is automatically started
upon satisfying the starting condi-
tions.
The ISG system is always active,
when the engine is running.
Information
When the engine is automatically
started by the ISG system, some warn-
ing lights (i.e. ABS, ESC, ESC OFF,
EPS, and parking brake warning
light) may illuminate for a few sec-
onds due to the low battery voltage.
However, it does not indicate a mal-
function with the ISG system.
To activate the ISG system
Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop mode
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to
0km/h.
2. Shift to D (Drive) or N (Neutral).
3. Press the brake pedal.
The auto stop indicator ( ) illumi-
nates in green on the instrument
cluster, when the engine stops.
Information
The driving speed must reach at least
8 km/h after an idle stop.
i
i
ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Driving your vehicle
OAD055014
5-55
Driving your vehicle
When the driver unfastens the seat-
belt or open the driver's door (or the
hood) in the auto stop mode, you will
experience the followings.
• The ISG system is deactivated.
(The ISG OFF button indicator illu-
minates.)
• If equipped with a supervision clus-
ter the message, 'Auto Stop deac-
tivated. Start manually', appears
on the LCD display.
Auto start
To restart the engine in the auto
stop mode
• Release the brake pedal.
• If equipped with a supervision clus-
ter the message, "Press brake
pedal for Auto Start", appears on
the LCD display.
• The auto stop indicator ( ) goes
OFF on the instrument cluster,
when the engine is restarted.
5
OAD055011
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTLE055035/OTLE055036
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAD055086L/OAD055087L
5-56
The engine is automatically restart-
ed in the following situations.
- The fan speed of the manual cli-
mate control system is set above
the 3rd position, with the air condi-
tion ON.
- The fan speed of the automatic cli-
mate control system is set above
the 6th position, with the air condi-
tion ON.
- A certain period of time has been
elapsed with the air condition ON.
- The defroster is activated.
- The brake vacuum pressure is low.
- The battery is weak.
- The driving speed exceeds 2 km/h.
The auto stop indicator ( ) blinks
in green for 5 seconds on the instru-
ment cluster,
Prerequisite for activation
The ISG system operates in the fol-
lowing situations.
- The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
- The driver’s door and the hood are
closed.
- The brake vacuum pressure is
adequate.
- The battery is sufficiently charged.
- The outside temperature is between
-2 °C and 35 °C (28.4 °F and 95 °F).
- The engine coolant temperature is
not too low.
Driving your vehicle
OAD055015
5-57
Driving your vehicle
Information
• The ISG system is not activated,
when the prerequisites to activate
the ISG system are unsatisfied. In
this case, the ISG OFF button indi-
cator illuminates, and if equipped
with a supervision cluster the mes-
sage, "Auto Stop conditions not
met", appears on the LCD display.
• When the above indicator remains
ON, or when the above message
remains displayed, we recommend
you to have the IGS system checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
To deactivate the ISG system
• Press the ISG OFF button to deac-
tivate the ISG system. Then, the
ISG OFF button indicator illumi-
nates, and if equipped with a
supervision cluster the message,
"Auto Stop Off", appears on the
LCD display.
• Press the ISG OFF button again to
reactivate the ISG system. Then,
the ISG OFF button indicator turns
OFF.
ISG system malfunction
The ISG system may not operate:
When there is a malfunction with the
ISG sensors or the ISG system.
The followings occur, when there is
a malfunction with the ISG system:
• The auto stop indicator ( ) will
blink in yellow.
i
5
OAD055012L
OAD055011L
5-58
• The light on the ISG OFF button
will illuminate.
Information
• When you cannot turn off the ISG
OFF button indicator by pressing
the ISG OFF button, or when the
malfunction with the ISG system
persists, we recommend you to con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
• You can turn off the ISG OFF but-
ton indicator by driving over 80
km/h (50 mph) for up to 2 hours
with the fan speed below the 2nd
position. If the ISG OFF button
indicator remains ON, we recom-
mend you to contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
i
Driving your vehicle
OAD055011
When the engine is in auto stop
mode, the engine may restart.
Before leaving the vehicle or
checking the engine compart-
ment, stop the engine by plac-
ing the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position or remov-
ing the ignition key.
WARNING
5-59
Driving your vehicle
The battery sensor deactiva-
tion
The battery sensor is deactivated,
when the battery is disconnected
from the negative pole for mainte-
nance purpose.
In this case, the ISG system is limit-
edly operated due to the battery sen-
sor deactivation. Thus, the driver
needs to take the following proce-
dures to reactivate the battery sen-
sor after disconnecting the battery.
Prerequisites to reactivate the
battery sensor
Keep the engine in the OFF status
for 4 hours, and attempt to restart the
engine 3 to 4 times for the battery-
sensor reactivation.
Pay extreme caution not to connect
any accessories (i.e. navigation and
black box) to the vehicle with the
engine in the OFF status. If not, the
battery sensor may not be reactivat-
ed.
Information
The ISG system may not operate in
the following situations.
- There is a malfunction with the IGS
system.
- The battery is weak.
- The brake vacuum pressure is low.
In those cases, we recommend you to
have the ISG system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only the genuine HYUNDAI
ISG battery for replacement. If
not, the ISG system may not nor-
mally operate.
• Do not recharge the ISG battery
with a general battery charger. If
not, it may damage or explode
the ISG battery.
• Do not remove the battery cap. If
not, the battery electrolyte,
which is harmful to the human
body, may leak out.
NOTICE
i
5
OAD055013
Battery sensor
5-60
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver's preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the NOR-
MAL mode (except if it is in ECO
mode), when the engine is restarted.
Information
If there is a problem with the instru-
ment cluster, the drive mode will be in
NORMAL mode and may not change
to ECO mode or SPORT mode.
The mode changes, as below,
whenever the DRIVE MODE button
is pressed.
When NORMAL mode is selected,
it is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
ECO mode
When the Drive Mode is
set to ECO mode, the
engine and transmission
control logic are changed
to maximize fuel efficiency.
• When the ECO mode is selected
by pressing the DRIVE MODE but-
ton, the ECO indicator (green
color) will illuminate.
• If the vehicle is set to ECO mode,
when the engine is turned OFF
and restarted the Drive Mode set-
ting will remain in ECO mode.
Information
Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's
driving habit and road condition.
i
i
ECO
NORMAL SPORT
OAD055016R
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
OAD055016
5-61
Driving your vehicle
5
When the ECO mode is activated:
• The acceleration response may be
slightly reduced as the accelerator
pedal is depressed moderately.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transmission may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the ECO mode is
activated to improve fuel efficiency.
Limitation of the ECO mode oper-
ation:
If the following conditions occur while
the ECO mode is operating, the sys-
tem operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
engine torque is restricted.
• When driving the vehicle with the
automatic transmission or the dual
clutch transmission gear shift lever
in manual shift mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode manages
the driving dynamics by
automatically adjusting the
steering effort, the engine
and transmission control logic for
enhanced driver performance.
• When SPORT mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the SPORT indicator (orange
color) will illuminate.
• Whenever the engine is restarted,
the Drive Mode will revert back to
NORMAL mode. If SPORT mode is
desired, re-select SPORT mode
from the DRIVE MODE button.
• When SPORT mode is activated:
- The engine rpm will tend to
remain raised over a certain
length of time even after releas-
ing the accelerator
- Upshifts are delayed when accel-
erating
Information
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
i
5-62
Driving your vehicle
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear
bumper to monitor and warn the driv-
er of an approaching vehicle in the
driver's blind spot area.
The system monitors the rear area of
the vehicle and provides information
to the driver with an audible alert and
a indicator on the outside side view
mirrors.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The blind spot detection range
varies relative to vehicle speed.
Note that if your vehicle is travel-
ing much faster than the vehicles
around you, the warning will not
occur.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
The Lane Change Assist feature
will alert you when a vehicle is
approaching in an adjacent lane
at a high rate of speed. If the driv-
er activates the turn signal when
the system detects an oncoming
vehicle, the system sounds an
audible alert.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert fea-
ture monitors approaching cross
traffic from the left and right side
of the vehicle when your vehicle is
in reverse. The feature will operate
when the vehicle is moving in
reverse below about 10 km/h (6
mph). If oncoming cross traffic is
detected a warning chime will
sound.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OTL055139
Blind spot area
Closing at high speed
• Always be aware of road con-
ditions while driving and be
alert for unexpected situations
even though the Blind Spot
Detection System is operat-
ing.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system to assist you. Do
not entirely rely on the sys-
tem. Always pay attention,
while driving, for your safety.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is not a substi-
tute for proper and safe driving.
Always drive safely and use
caution when changing lanes
or backing up the vehicle. The
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
WARNING
5-63
Driving your vehicle
5
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
To operate:
Press the BSD switch with the
Ignition switch in the ON position.
The indicator on the BSD switch will
illuminate. When the vehicle speed
exceeds 30 km/h (20 mph), the sys-
tem will be activated.
To cancel:
Press the BSD switch again. The
indicator on the switch will go off.
When the system is not used, turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
Information
• If the engine is turned off then on
again, the BSD system returns to the
previous state.
• When the system is turned on, the
warning light will illuminate for 3
seconds on the outside rearview
mirror.
Operating conditions
The system will activate when:
1. The system is on.
2. The vehicle speed is above about
30 km/h (20 mph).
3. An oncoming vehicle is detected
in the blind spot area.
i
■ Left-hand drive
OAD055027
■ Right-hand drive
OAD055027R
5-64
Driving your vehicle
First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
Once the detected vehicle is no
longer within the blind spot area, the
warning will turn off according to the
driving conditions of the vehicle.
OAD055028
■ Left side
■ Right side
OAD055029
■ Left side
OAD055030
■ Right side
Second stage alert
A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:
1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system
(the warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror) AND
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being
detected).
When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outside rearview mir-
ror will also blink.
If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the warning chime will be deacti-
vated.
5-65
Driving your vehicle
5
• The second stage alarm may be
deactivated.
- To activate the warning chime:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
- To deactivate the warning chime:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
Information
The warning chime function helps
alert the driver. Deactivate this func-
tion only when it is necessary
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for proper operation of the system.
Warning message
BSD canceled
• This warning message may appear
when :
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the
BSD sensor does not detect
another vehicle for an extended
period of time.
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain.
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BSD switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
i
OAD055031
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAD055090L/OLF054217N
5-66
Driving your vehicle
When the BSD canceled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
After any dirt or debris is removed,
the BSD system should operate nor-
mally after about 10 minutes of driv-
ing the vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check BSD system
If there is a problem with the BSD
system, a warning message will
appear and the light on the switch
will turn off. The system will turn off
automatically. We recommend that
you have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
(if equipped)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature
monitors approaching cross traffic
from the left and right side of the
vehicle when your vehicle is in
reverse.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAD055091L/OTLE055040
5-67
Driving your vehicle
5
Operating conditions
To operate:
Go to the User Settings mode
(Driving Assist) and select Rear
Cross Traffic Alert on the LCD dis-
play (For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in chapter 3.). The
system will turn on and standby to
activate. The system will activate
when vehicle speed is below 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) and with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
Information
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
detecting range is approximately
0.5 m ~ 20 m (1 ft ~ 65 ft). An
approaching vehicle will be detected if
their vehicle speed is within 4 km/h ~
36 km/h (2.5 ~ 22.5 mph ).
Note that the detecting range may
vary under certain conditions. As
always, use caution and pay close
attention to your surroundings when
backing up your vehicle.
Warning type
If the vehicle detected by the sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound, the warning
light on the outside rearview mirror
will blink and a message will appear
on the LCD display.
i
• Type A
■ Left
■ Right
• Type B
• Type A
• Type B
OAD055046L/OAD055048L
OAD055047L/OAD055049L
OAD055092L/OAD055093L
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-68
Driving your vehicle
Information
• The warning chime will turn off
when the detected vehicle moves out
of the sensing area or if your vehicle
is moved away from the detected
vehicle.
• The system may not operate proper-
ly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surrounding.
• If the sensing area near the rear
bumper is blocked by either a wall
or barrier or by a parked vehicle,
the system sensing area may be
reduced.
i
(Continued)
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving practices. Always
drive safely and use caution
when changing lanes or back-
ing up your vehicle. The Blind
Spot Detection System (BSD)
may not detect every object
alongside the vehicle.
• The warning light on the out-
side rearview mirror will illu-
minate whenever a vehicle is
detected at the rear side by
the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely
rely on the system but check
your surrounding before
changing lanes or backing the
vehicle up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check your surround-
ings while driving.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-69
Driving your vehicle
• The system may not work prop-
erly when the bumper has been
damaged, or if the rear bumper
has been replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs some-
what according to the width of
the road. When the road is nar-
row, the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
Non-operating condition
The BSD indicator on the outer side
view mirror may not illuminate
properly when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is damaged.
- The mirror is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
- The window is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
- The window is tinted.
Limitations of the system
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the sys-
tem may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
- The vehicle drives on a curved road
or through a tollgate.
- The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
- The rear bumper where the sensor
is located is covered with a foreign
object such as a bumper sticker, a
bumper guard, a bike stand, etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
- The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in a
trunk, abnormal tire pressure, etc.
- The vehicle drives in inclement
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
- There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
NOTICE
5
5-70
Driving your vehicle
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
- While changing lanes.
- While going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle approaches
very close.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When the temperature of the rear
bumper is high.
- When the sensors are blocked by
other vehicles, walls or parking-lot
pillars.
- When the detected vehicle also
moves back, as your vehicle drives
back.
- If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping
cart or a baby carriage.
- If there is a low height vehicle such
as a sports car.
- When other vehicles are close to
your vehicle.
- When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane from
you.
5-71
Driving your vehicle
5
Cruise Control operation
1. CRUISE indicator
2. SET indicator
The Cruise Control system allows you
to drive at speeds above 30 km/h
(20 mph) without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transmission vehicle, do
not shift into neutral without
depressing the clutch pedal, since
the engine will be overrevved. If
this happens, depress the clutch
pedal or press the cruise control
ON / OFF button.
NOTICE
CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Take the following precautions:
• If the Cruise Control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illumi-
nated) the Cruise Control can
be activated unintentionally.
Keep the Cruise Control sys-
tem off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Cruise Control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the Cruise Control
when it may be unsafe to keep
the vehicle at a constant
speed:
- When driving in heavy traffic
or when traffic conditions
make it difficult to drive at a
constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- When driving on hilly or
windy roads
- When driving in windy areas
WARNING
OAD055085L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055035
5-72
Driving your vehicle
Information
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat-
ed or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• Before activating the cruise control
function, the system will check to
verify that the brake switch is oper-
ating normally. Depress the brake
pedal at least once after turning ON
the ignition or starting the engine.
Cruise control switch
CANCEL/O : Cancels cruise control
operation.
CRUISE / : Turns cruise control
system on or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
To set Cruise Control speed
1. Press the CRUISE / button on
the steering wheel to turn the sys-
tem on. The CRUISE indicator will
illuminate.
i
OAD055019L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055019
OAD055089L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055088L
5-73
Driving your vehicle
5
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
Information
- Manual trans-
mission
For manual transmission vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
3. Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET -), and release it. The SET
indicator light will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Information
On a steep slope, the vehicle may
slightly slow down or speed up, while
driving uphill or downhill.
i
i
OAD055020L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055020
5-74
Driving your vehicle
To increase Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and hold it, while monitor-
ing the SET speed on the instru-
ment cluster.
Release the toggle switch when
the desired speed is shown and
the vehicle will accelerate to that
speed.
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase
2.0 km/h (1.2 mph) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the toggle
switch (1) down (SET-).
To decrease Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will
gradually slow down. Release the
toggle switch at the speed you
want to maintain.
OAD055020L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055020
OAD055021L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055021
5-75
Driving your vehicle
5
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
2.0 km/h (1.2 mph) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the toggle switch (1)
down (SET-).
To temporarily accelerate with
the Cruise Control ON
Depress the accelerator pedal. When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previ-
ously set speed.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at the increased speed, the
Cruise Control will maintain the
increased speed.
Cruise Control will be canceled
when:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Depressing the clutch pedal.
(for manual transmission vehicle)
OAD055022L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055022
5-76
Driving your vehicle
• Pressing the CANCEL / O button
located on the steering wheel.
• Pressing the CRUISE / button.
Both the CRUISE indicator and the
SET indicator will turn OFF.
• Moving the shift lever into N
(Neutral). (for automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission)
• Decreasing the vehicle speed
lower than the speed by 20 km/h
(12 mph).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 30 km/h
(20 mph).
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is operating.
• Downshifting to 2
nd
gear when in
Manual Shift mode.
Information
Each of the above actions will cancel
Cruise Control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but only pressing the
CRUISE button will turn the system
off. If you wish to resume Cruise
Control operation, push the toggle
switch up (RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed, unless the sys-
tem was turned off using the CRUISE
button.
To resume preset Cruising
speed
Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+). If the vehicle speed is over
30 km/h (20 mph), the vehicle will
resume the preset speed.
i
OAD055021L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055021
5-77
Driving your vehicle
5
To turn Cruise Control off
• Press the CRUISE / button (the
CRUISE indicator light will go off).
• Turn the engine OFF.
OAD055019L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD055019
5-78
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving elements
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud and sand, take the
bellow suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and keep a longer
braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, use second gear.
Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec-
essary wheel spin.
• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or
other non-slip materials under the
wheels to provide additional trac-
tion while the vehicle becomes
stuck in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a for-
ward gear.
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelera-
tor pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission while driving on
slippery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck and
excessive wheel spin occurs,
the temperature in the tires can
increase very quickly. If the tires
become damaged, a tire blow
out or tire explosion can occur.
This condition is dangerous -
you and others may be injured.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle.
If you attempt to free the vehi-
cle, the vehicle can overheat
quickly, possibly causing an
engine compartment fire or
other damage. Try to avoid spin-
ning the wheels as much as
possible to prevent overheating
of either the tires or the engine.
DO NOT allow the vehicle to
spin the wheels above 56 km/h
(35 mph).
WARNING
5-79
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
The ESC system (if equipped) must be
turned OFF before rocking the vehi-
cle.
If you are still stuck after rocking
the vehicle a few times, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle
to avoid engine overheating, pos-
sible damage to the transmission,
and tire damage. See "Towing" in
chapter 6.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.
Driving at night
Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlamps will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lamps of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra follow-
ing distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increas-
es the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if
equipped)
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
• Be sure your tires have enough
tread. If your tires do not have
enough tread, making a quick stop
on wet pavement can cause a skid
and possibly lead to an accident.
See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
NOTICE
i
5-80
Driving your vehicle
• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driv-
ing until normal braking operation
returns.
Hydroplaning
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet.
The risk of hydroplaning increas-
es as the depth of tire tread
decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in
chapter 7.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.
Under-inflation may overheat or
damage the tires.
Do not install worn-out or damaged
tires, which may reduce traction or
fail the braking operation.
Information
Never over-inflate your tires above the
maximum inflation pressure, as speci-
fied on your tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
Driving at higher speeds on the high-
way consumes more fuel and is less
efficient than driving at a slower,
more moderate speed. Maintain a
moderate speed in order to conserve
fuel when driving on the highway.
Be sure to check both the engine
coolant level and the engine oil
before driving.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
i
5-81
Driving your vehicle
5
The severe weather conditions of
winter quickly wear out tires and
cause other problems. To minimize
winter driving problems, you should
take the following suggestions:
Snow or icy conditions
You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause the vehicle to skid.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Information
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local and municipal regula-
tions for possible restrictions against
their use.
i
WINTER DRIVING
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
WARNING
5-82
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use gen-
uine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instruc-
tions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
Information
• Install tire chains on the front tires.
It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tires will provide a
greater driving force, but will not
prevent side skids.
• Do not install studded tires without
first checking local and municipal
regulations for possible restrictions
against their use.
i
OAD055077
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling:
• Drive less than 30 km/h (20
mph) or the chain manufactur-
er's recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.
WARNING
5-83
Driving your vehicle
5
Chain Installation
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 30 km/h (20 mph))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chas-
sis, stop and tighten them. If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driving
0.5~1.0 km (0.3~0.6 miles).
• Do not use tire chains on vehi-
cles equipped with aluminum
wheels. If unavoidable, use a
wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 15 mm
(0.59 in) wide to prevent damage
to the chain's connection.
Winter Precautions
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
NOTICE
5-84
Driving your vehicle
Check battery and cables
The winter temperature increases
the battery consumption. Inspect
the battery and cables, as speci-
fied in the chapter 7. The battery
charging level can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or in a
service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some regions during winter, it is
recommended to use the "winter
weight" oil with lower viscosity. For
further information, refer to the chap-
ter 8. When you are not sure about a
type of winter weight oil, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect the spark plugs, as speci-
fied in the chapter 7. If necessary,
replace them. Also check all ignition
wirings and components for any
cracks, wear-out, and damage.
To prevent locks from freezing
To prevent the locks from being
frozen, spray approved de-icing fluid
or glycerin into key holes. When a
lock opening is already covered with
ice, spray approved de-icing fluid
over the ice to remove it. When an
internal part of a lock freezes, try to
thaw it with a heated key. Carefully
use the heated key to avoid an injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze solution in system
To prevent the window washer from
being frozen, add authorized window
washer anti-freeze solution, as spec-
ified on the window washer contain-
er. Window washer anti-freeze solu-
tion is available from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, and so are the
most vehicle accessory outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types
of anti-freeze solution to prevent any
damage to the vehicle paint.
5-85
Driving your vehicle
5
Do not let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. When
there is the risk that your parking
brake may freeze, temporarily apply
it with the shift lever in P (Park). Also,
block the rear wheels in advance, so
the vehicle may not roll. Then,
release the parking brake.
Do not let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in such conditions during the
severe winter, you should check
underneath the vehicle on a regular
basis, so that moving the front
wheels and the steering components
is unblocked.
Carry emergency equipment
In accordance with weather condi-
tions, you should carry appropriate
emergency equipment, while driving.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables,
window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Do not place objects or materials
in the engine compartment
Putting objects or materials in the
engine compartment may cause an
engine failure or combustion,
because those may block the engine
cooling. Such damage will not be
covered by the manufacturer's war-
ranty.
5-86
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering to tow with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your country's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine legal
requirements. Since laws vary the
requirements for towing trailers, cars,
or other types of vehicles or appara-
tus may differ. Ask an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for further details
before towing.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in han-
dling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly. Damage to your vehi-
cle caused by improper trailer towing
is not covered by your vehicle manu-
facturer’s warranty.
This section contains many time-
tested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
TRAILER TOWING
Take the following precautions:
• If you don't use the correct
towing equipment, or if you
drive improperly while towing,
you can lose control of the
vehicle when pulling a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the braking per-
formance may be reduced.
You and your passengers
could be seriously or fatally
injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the
steps in this section.
• Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW
(Gross Combination Weight),
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight),
GAW (Gross Axle Weight ) and
trailer tongue load are all with-
in the limits.
WARNING
5-87
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
- For Europe
• The technically permissible maxi-
mum load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 %
and the technically permissible
maximum laden mass of the vehicle
may be exceeded by not more than
10% or 100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichev-
er value is lower. In this case, do not
exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) for
vehicle of category M1 or 80 km/h
(49.7 mph) for vehicle of category
N1.
• When a vehicle of category M1 is
towing a trailer, the additional load
imposed at the trailer coupling
device may cause the tire maximum
load ratings to be exceeded, but not
by more than 15%. In this case, do
not exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) and
increase the tire inflation pressure
by at least 0.2 bar.
If you decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a trailer hitch dealer about
sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your
vehicle during its first 2,000 km
(1,200 miles) in order to allow the
engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in
serious engine or transmission
damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for further information on
additional requirements such as a
towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)) or posted towing speed
limit.
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• Carefully observe the weight and
load limits provided in the following
pages.
i
5-88
Driving your vehicle
Trailer weight
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy. It depends on how you
plan to use your trailer. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how often your
vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. The ideal trailer weight can
also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Tongue load
The tongue load is an important
weight to measure because it affects
the total Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. The trailer
tongue should weigh a maximum of
10% of the total loaded trailer weight,
within the limits of the maximum trail-
er tongue load permissible.
After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by mov-
ing some items around in the trailer.
Take the following precautions:
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check weights
and loading at a commercial
scale or highway patrol office
equipped with scales.
WARNING
OLMB053048
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
OLMB053047
Tongue Load
Total Trailer Weight
5-89
Driving your vehicle
5
M/T : Manual transmission
A/T : Automatic transmission
DCT : Dual clutch transmission
Item
Gasoline Engine
Diesel Engine
1.6 MPI
2.0 MPI 1.6 VGT
M/T
A/T M/T A/T M/T DCT
Maximum trailer weight
kg (Ibs.)
Without brake
System
610
(1344)
610
(1344)
610
(1344)
610
(1344)
300
(661)
300
(661)
With brake
System
1200
(2645)
1100
(2425)
1200
(2645)
1100
(2425)
300
(661)
300
(661)
Maximum permissible static vertical load
on the coupling device
kg (Ibs.)
1115 (2458)
Recommended distance from rear wheel
center to coupling point
mm (inch)
1090 (43)
Reference weight and distance when towing a trailer
■
Except Western Europe
5-90
Driving your vehicle
Item
Gasoline Engine
1.6 MPI
2.0 MPI
M/T
A/T M/T A/T
Maximum trailer weight
kg (Ibs.)
Without brake
System
300
(661)
300
(661)
300
(661)
300
(661)
With brake System
300
(661)
300
(661)
300
(661)
300
(661)
Maximum permissible static vertical load on the
coupling device
kg (Ibs.)
1115 (2458)
Recommended distance from rear wheel center to
coupling point
mm (inch)
1090 (43)
■
For Western Europe
M/T : Manual transmission
A/T : Automatic transmission
5-91
Driving your vehicle
5
Trailer towing equipment
Hitches
Information
The mounting hole for hitches are
located on both sides of the underbody
behind the rear tires.
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Do you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you
don't seal them, carbon monoxide
(CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle, as well as dirt
and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• A HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory
is available at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trail-
er. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave
just enough slack so you can turn
with your trailer. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
i
OAD065031L
5-92
Driving your vehicle
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
ing system, make sure it conforms
your country's regulations and that it
is properly installed and operating
correctly.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trail-
er brakes loaded, then it needs its
own brakes and they must be ade-
quate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so
you'll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly. Do not tap
into your vehicle's brake system.
Trailer brakes must be applied sepa-
rately from your vehicle's brake sys-
tem.
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint your-
self with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not nearly as responsive
as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and brakes.
During your trip, occasionally check
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and trailer brakes
are still working.
Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You will need more passing distance
up ahead when you're towing a trail-
er. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you'll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move your hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and, if possi-
ble, have someone guide you.
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system. This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent trail-
er shop for this work.
WARNING
5-93
Driving your vehicle
5
Making turns
When you're turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won't strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects. Avoid jerky or sud-
den maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn signals
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you're about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It's important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you dis-
connect and then reconnect the
wires.
Driving on hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don't shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
overheated and may not operate effi-
ciently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transmission
overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trail-
er brakes and you have an automat-
ic transmission, you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build-up and extend the life of
your transmission.
Do not connect a trailer lighting
system directly to your vehi-
cle's lighting system. Use an
approved trailer wiring harness.
Failure to do so could result in
damage to the vehicle electrical
system and/or personal injury.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for assistance.
WARNING
5-94
Driving your vehicle
To prevent engine and/or transmis-
sion (transmission) overheating:
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not
overheat. If the needle of the
coolant temperature gauge
moves towards “130 or H(Hot)” ,
pull over and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so, and allow the
engine to idle until it cools
down.You may proceed once the
engine has cooled sufficiently.
• When towing a trailer, your vehi-
cle speed may be much slower
than the general flow of traffic,
especially when climbing an
uphill grade. Use the right hand
lane when towing a trailer on an
uphill grade. Choose your vehi-
cle speed according to the max-
imum posted speed limit for
vehicles with trailers, the steep-
ness of the grade, and your trail-
er weight.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• For vehicles equipped with the
dual clutch transmission, some
extra precaution should be
taken when towing a trailer. Due
to the added load on the trans-
mission when towing a trailer,
the clutches may get hot if the
vehicle experiences excessive
upshifting and downshifting.
Under certain conditions, such
as repeated stop-and-go launch-
es on steep grades, the trans-
mission clutches may become
overheated. When the clutches
start to become overheated, the
transmission safe protection
mode logic is enabled. If the safe
protection mode logic is
enabled, the gear position indi-
cator on the cluster LCD display
blinks, a chime sounds, and a
warning message will appear.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the dual clutch transmission
starts to become overheated,
the gear shift characteristics
may change. Gear shifts may
become more abrupt. If contin-
ued operation while towing a
trailer includes frequent and
continuous upshifts and down-
shifts, the overheat warning
message on the cluster LCD dis-
play may illuminate. If this
occurs, stop the vehicle, apply
the brakes or shift the vehicle to
(P) Park, and allow the transmis-
sion to cool.
NOTICE
5-95
Driving your vehicle
5
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill.
However, if you ever have to park
your trailer on a hill, here's how to do
it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
area.
Turn the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb (right if head-
ed down hill, left if headed up hill).
2. Shift the vehicle to P (Park, for
automatic transmission vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transmission
vehicle).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off
the vehicle.
4. Place wheel chocks under the
trailer wheels on the down hill side
of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, apply the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the park-
ing brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes and parking
brakes.
7. Move the shift lever to P (Park, for
automatic transmission/dual clutch
transmission vehicle) or 1
st
gear
when the vehicle is parked on a
uphill grade and in R (Reverse) on
a downhill (for manual transmis-
sion vehicle).
8. Shut off the vehicle and release
the vehicle brakes but leave the
parking brake set.
Driving the vehicle after it has
been parked on a hill
1. With the shift lever in P (Park, for
automatic transmission/dual clutch
vehicle) or neutral (for manual
transmission vehicle), apply the
brakes and hold the brake pedal
down while performing the follow-
ing:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
To prevent serious or fatal
injury:
• Do not get out of the vehicle
without the parking brake
firmly set. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You and
others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal to hold the vehicle on
an uphill.
WARNING
5-96
Driving your vehicle
Maintenance when towing a
trailer
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, auto-
matic transmission fluid, axle lubri-
cant and cooling system fluid. Brake
condition is another important item to
frequently check. If you're trailering,
it's a good idea to review these items
before you start your trip. Don't forget
to also maintain your trailer and
hitch. Follow the maintenance sched-
ule that accompanied your trailer and
check it periodically. Preferably,
inspect the vehicle and trailer at the
start of each day's driving. Inspect
the hitch mounting to make sure the
hitch is properly secured to the vehi-
cle. Inspect the trailer electrical
wiring to make sure brake lights, turn
signal lights, running lights, and haz-
ard lights are working properly.
To prevent vehicle damage:
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
on hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indi-
cates over-heating, switch off
the air conditioner and stop the
vehicle in a safe area to cool
down the engine.
• When towing check the automat-
ic transmission fluid more fre-
quently. (Note: This is not appli-
cable for vehicles equipped with
the dual clutch transmission.)
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with an air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan
to improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
NOTICE
5-97
Driving your vehicle
5
Two labels on your driver’s door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiar-
ize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle's weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-
tions and the Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver’s door sill.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
The Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle are on the Certification
Label attached to the driver's
(or front passenger’s) door.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weighing
the items (and people) before
putting them in the vehicle. Be
careful not to overload your
vehicle.
WARNING
What to do in an emergency
Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2
In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-2
If the engine stalls while driving...................................6-2
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .........6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving..............................6-3
If the engine will not start ...................................6-4
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns
over slowly ..........................................................................6-4
If the engine turns over normally but
doesn't start .......................................................................6-4
Jump starting ..........................................................6-4
If the engine overheats ........................................6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......6-10
Check tire pressure .......................................................6-10
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-11
Low tire pressure telltale..............................................6-12
Low tire pressure position and Tire pressure
telltale ................................................................................6-12
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator .....................................................6-13
Changing a tire with TPMS...........................................6-14
If you have a flat tire..........................................6-16
Jack and tools ..................................................................6-16
Changing tires ..................................................................6-17
Jack label...........................................................................6-22
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack......................6-23
Towing ...................................................................6-24
Towing service .................................................................6-24
Removable towing hook ................................................6-25
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-26
Emergency commodity........................................6-28
Fire extinguisher .............................................................6-28
First aid kit ......................................................................6-28
Triangle reflector ............................................................6-28
Tire pressure gauge .......................................................6-28
6
6-2
The hazard warning flasher serves as
a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button with the Engine
Start/Stop button in any position. The
button is located in the center fascia
panel. All turn signal lights will flash
simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
If the engine stalls while driving
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flash-
er.
• Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, we recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
OAD045400
6-3
What to do in an emergency
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P (Park,
for automatic transmission/dual
clutch transmission vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transmission
vehicle), apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.
6
6-4
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
What to do in an emergency
If the engine doesn't turn over
or turns over slowly
• Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) if it is an auto-
matic transmission vehicle. The
engine starts only when the shift
lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could cause damage to
your vehicle. See instructions for
"Jump Starting" provided in this
chapter.
If the engine turns over nor-
mally but doesn't start
• Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload which can
lead to damage to the emission
control system.
CAUTION
JUMP STARTING
6-5
What to do in an emergency
6
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start
with a low or frozen battery.
6-6
What to do in an emergency
To prevent damage to your vehi-
cle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to
jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
Jump starting procedure
1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park, for
automatic transmission vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transmission
vehicle), and set the parking
brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.
i
NOTICE
Pb
6-7
What to do in an emergency
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
5. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-) battery/
chassis ground of the assisting
vehicle (3).
7. Connect the other end of the sec-
ond jumper cable to the black,
negative (-) chassis ground of
your vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery or jumper terminals or
the correct ground. Do not lean
over the battery when making
connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approxi-
mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-
utes. Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, neg-
ative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+)
battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
6
1VQA4001
6-8
What to do in an emergency
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine may be over-
heating. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park, for
automatic transmission vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transmission
vehicle) and set the parking brake.
If the air conditioning is ON, turn it
OFF.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is
operating. If the fan is not running,
turn the engine off.
4. Check for coolant leaking from the
radiator, hoses or under the vehi-
cle. (If the air conditioning had been
in use, it is normal for cold water to
be draining from it when you stop.)
5. If engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and we rec-
ommend that you call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
While the engine is
running, keep hands,
clothing and tools
away from the mov-
ing parts such as the
cooling fan and drive
belt to prevent seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
NEVER remove the
radiator cap or the
drain plug while the
engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclock-
wise to remove it.
WARNING
6-9
What to do in an emergency
6
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir to bring the fluid level in
the reservoir up to the halfway
mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
we recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
• Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates a leak in the cooling
system and we recommend
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the engine overheats
from low engine coolant, sud-
denly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the
engine. To prevent damage,
add engine coolant slowly in
small quantities.
CAUTION
6-10
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/TPMS
Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low Tire Pressure Position
Telltale and Tire Pressure Telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Check tire pressure
(if equipped)
• You can check the tire pressure in
the Information Mode on the clus-
ter.
Refer to the "User Settings
Mode" section in chapter 3.
• Tire pressure is displayed after a
few minutes of driving after initial
engine start up.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive
to display" message will appear.
After driving, check the tire pres-
sure.
• The displayed tire pressure values
may differ from those measured
with a tire pressure gauge.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings Mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User
Settings Mode" section in
chapter 3).
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
What to do in an emergency
OAD065001
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
OAD045184N
OAD065024L/OAD065025L
6-11
What to do in an emergency
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-
cle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
6
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
6-12
If any of the below happens, have
the system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
1. The Low Tire Pressure Telltale/
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
does not illuminate for 3 sec-
onds when the ignition switch
is placed to the ON position or
engine is running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
remains illuminated after blink-
ing for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure Position
Telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure
telltale
Low tire pressure position and
tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and warning message dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The Low Tire
Pressure Position Telltale will indi-
cate which tire is significantly under-
inflated by illuminating the corre-
sponding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will
remain on and the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may blink for one minute
and then remain illuminated (when
the vehicle is driven approximately
20 minutes at speed above 25 km/h
(15.5 mph)) until you have the low
pressure tire repaired and replaced
on the vehicle.
Information
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
i
NOTICE
What to do in an emergency
■ Supervision cluster
(Type A)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type B)
OAD045184N/OAD065032N
6-13
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the Low Tire Pressure
Position Telltale will not be dis-
played even though the vehicle
has an under-inflated tire.
NOTICE
6
In winter or cold weather, the
Low Tire Pressure Telltale may
be illuminated if the tire pres-
sure was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunc-
tioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a propor-
tional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
6-14
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
may illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is near
electric power supply cables or
radio transmitters such as police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations,
military installations, airports,
transmitting towers, etc.
Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may illuminate if snow
chains are used or electronic
devices such as computers, charg-
ers, remote starters, navigation,
etc. This may interfere with normal
operation of the TPMS.
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. Have the flat tire repaired
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible or replace the
flat tire with the spare tire.
The spare tire (if equipped) does not
come with a tire pressure monitoring
sensor. When the low pressure tire or
the flat tire is replaced with the spare
tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale will
remain on. Also, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is driven at
speed above 25 km/h (15.5 mph) for
approximately 20 minutes.
Once the original tire equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
reinflated to the recommended pres-
sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the Low Tire Pressure Telltale and
TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go
off within a few minutes of driving.
If the indicators do not extinguish
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serv-
iced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
You may not be able to identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gauge to measure. Please
note that a tire that is hot (from being
driven) will have a higher pressure
measurement than a tire that is cold.
NOTICE
What to do in an emergency
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by HYUNDAI deal-
er may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
CAUTION
6-15
What to do in an emergency
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
6
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may interfere with the
system's ability to warn the driv-
er of low tire pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may void the warranty
for that portion of the vehicle.
WARNING
For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle; it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
•
If you use the wheels on the mar-
ket, use a TPMS sensor approved
by a HYUNDAI de
aler. If your
vehicle is not equipped with a
TPMS sensor or TPMS does not
work properly, you may fail the
periodic vehicle inspection con-
ducted in your country.
❈
All vehicles sold in the EUROPE
market during below period
must be equipped with TPMS.
- New model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2012 ~
- Current model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on vehi-
cle registrations)
WARNING
6-16
What to do in an emergency
Jack and tools
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment under the luggage box
cover.
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Turn the winged hold down bolt
counterclockwise to remove the
spare tire.
Store the spare tire in the same com-
partment by turning the winged hold
down bolt clockwise.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from "rattling", store them in their
proper location.
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
OLF064004N
OLF064031N
Changing a tire can be danger-
ous. Follow the instructions in
this section when changing a
tire to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Be careful as you use the jack
handle to stay clear of the flat
end. The flat end has sharp
edges that could cause cuts.
CAUTION
6-17
What to do in an emergency
6
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-
down wing bolt by hand, you can
loosen it easily using the jack handle.
1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack
handle.
Changing tires
A vehicle can slip or roll off of a
jack causing serious injury or
death to you or those nearby.
Take the following safety pre-
cautions:
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a
tire in the lane of traffic.
ALWAYS move the vehicle
completely off the road on
level, firm ground away from
traffic before trying to change
a tire. If you cannot find a
level, firm place off the road,
call a towing service for assis-
tance.
• Be sure to use the jack pro-
vided with the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• ALWAYS place the jack on the
designated jacking positions
on the vehicle and NEVER on
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jacking sup-
port.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Keep children away from the
road and the vehicle.
OLF064005
6-18
What to do in an emergency
Follow these steps to change your
vehicle's tire:
1. Park on a level, firm surface.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park,
for automatic transmission vehi-
cle) or neutral (for manual trans-
mission vehicle), apply the park-
ing brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher
button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite of the tire
you are changing.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each in the
order shown above, but do not
remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off of the ground.
OAD065006
B
B
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
OAD065007
6-19
What to do in an emergency
6
7. Place the jack at the designated
jacking position under the frame
closest to the tire you are chang-
ing. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with
two notches and two dimples.
Never jack any other position or
part of the vehicle. It may damage
to the side seal molding.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Make sure the vehicle is
stable on the jack.
9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel
lug nut wrench and remove them
with your fingers. Remove the
wheel from the studs and lay it flat
on the ground out of the way.
Remove any dirt or debris from
the studs, mounting surfaces, and
wheel.
10. Install the spare tire onto the
studs of the hub.
11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-
gers onto the studs with the
smaller end of the lug nuts clos-
est to the wheel.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the jack handle coun-
terclockwise.
OAD065008
■ Front ■ Rear
OLF064012
6-20
What to do in an emergency
13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Double-check each lug
nut until they are tight. After
changing tires, we recommend
that an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer tighten the lug nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possi-
ble. The wheel lug nut should
be tightened to 11~13 kgf.m
(79~94 lbf.ft).
If you have a tire gauge, check the
tire pressure (see "Tires and
Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure
instructions.). If the pressure is lower
or higher than recommended, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and adjust it to the recommended
pressure. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
air may leak from the tire. If you lose
a valve cap, buy another and install it
as soon as possible. After changing
tires, secure the flat tire and return
the jack and tools to their proper stor-
age locations.
Check the tire pressure as soon
as possible after installing a spare
tire. Adjust it to the recommended
pressure.
If any of the equipment such as the
jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-
ment is damaged or in poor condi-
tion, do not attempt to change the
tire and call for assistance.
NOTICE
OLF064013
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the studs and lug nuts. Make
certain during tire changing
that the same nuts that were
removed are reinstalled. If you
have to replace your lug nuts
make sure they have metric
threads to avoid damaging the
studs and ensure the wheel is
properly secured to the hub. We
recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
CAUTION
6-21
What to do in an emergency
6
Use of compact spare tires
(if equipped)
Compact spare tires are designed for
emergency use only. Drive carefully
on the compact spare tire and
always follow the safety precautions.
When driving with the compact spare
tire mounted to your vehicle:
• Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire.
The compact spare tire should be
inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire's tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nut torque must be
set correctly. The correct lug nut
tightening torque is 11~13 kgf.m
(79~94 lbf.ft).
NOTICE
To prevent compact spare tire
failure and loss of control pos-
sibly resulting in an accident:
• Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency.
• NEVER operate your vehicle
over 80 km/h (50 mph).
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s
maximum load rating or the
load carrying capacity shown
on the sidewall of the com-
pact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire continuously. Repair or
replace the original tire as
soon as possible to avoid fail-
ure of the compact spare tire.
WARNING
6-22
Jack label
What to do in an emergency
To prevent damaging the com-
pact spare tire and your vehicle:
• Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all
hazards, such as a potholes
or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles.
The compact spare tire diame-
ter is smaller than the diame-
ter of a conventional tire and
reduces the ground clearance
approximately 25 mm (1 inch).
• Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare tire. Because
of the smaller size, a tire chain
will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim
rings be used with the com-
pact spare wheel.
CAUTION
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK065011
6-23
What to do in an emergency
6
JACKDOC14S
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack
6-24
What to do in an emergency
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
TOWING
OAD065015
Dolly
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground as
this may cause damage to the
vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
OAD065016
OAD065017
6-25
What to do in an emergency
6
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
1. Open the trunk, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
OLF064024
OAD065018
6-26
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you have it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commer-
cial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook at the front (or rear) of the
vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
Always follow these emergency tow-
ing precautions:
• Place the ignition switch in the ACC
position so the steering wheel is
not locked.
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced braking perform-
ance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
OAD065019
OAD065020
■ Front
■ Rear
6-27
What to do in an emergency
6
• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12
inches) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during tow-
ing.
• Before towing, check the automatic
transmission/dual clutch transmis-
sion for fluid leaks under your vehi-
cle. If the automatic transmission
/dual clutch transmission fluid is
leaking, flatbed equipment or a tow-
ing dolly must be used.
To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks
to pull a vehicle out of mud,
sand or other conditions from
which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own
power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to
15 km/h (10 mph) and drive
less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when
towing to avoid serious dam-
age to the automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission.
CAUTION
ODH063025
6-28
What to do in an emergency
Your vehicle is equipped with emer-
gency commodities to help you
respond to emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know
how to use the fire extinguisher, fol-
low these steps carefully.
1. Pull out the safety pin at the top of
the extinguisher that keeps the
handle from being accidentally
pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle towards the base
of the fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft)
away from the fire and squeeze
the handle to discharge the extin-
guisher. If you release the handle,
the discharge will stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth
at the base of the fire. After the fire
appears to be out, watch carefully
since it may re-ignite.
First aid kit
Supplies for use in giving first aid
such as scissors, bandage and
adhesive tape, etc. are provided.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the
road to warn oncoming vehicles dur-
ing emergencies, such as when the
vehicle is parked by the roadside due
to problems.
Tire pressure gauge
(if equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-
to-day use, and you may have to add
a air periodically and usually it is not
a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal
wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire
pressure increases with temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the
following steps:
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap
that is located on the rim of the
tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against
the tire valve. Some air will leak as
you begin and more will leak if you
don't press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will acti-
vate the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge to see whether the tire pres-
sure is low or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressure to the
specified pressure. Refer to "Tires
and Wheels" in chapter 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
7
Maintenance
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment .............................................7-3
Maintenance services ...........................................7-6
Owner's responsibility......................................................7-6
Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-6
Owner maintenance...............................................7-7
Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-8
Scheduled maintenance services ......................7-10
Normal maintenance schedule
- Gasoline engine (For Europe) ..................................7-11
Maintenance under severe usage and low mileage
conditions - Gasoline engine (For Europe)..............7-14
Normal maintenance schedule
- Gasoline engine (Except Europe)............................7-16
Maintenance under severe usage and low mileage
conditions - Gasoline engine (Except Europe) .......7-20
Normal maintenance schedule - Diesel engine.......7-22
Maintenance under severe usage and low mileage
conditions - Diesel engine ..........................................7-26
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..7-28
Engine oil ..............................................................7-32
Checking the engine oil level ....................................7-32
Checking the engine oil and filter ..............................7-34
Engine coolant......................................................7-35
Checking the engine coolant level..............................7-35
Changing the coolant.....................................................7-37
Brake/clutch fluid ...............................................7-38
Checking the brake/clutch fluid level........................7-38
Washer fluid .........................................................7-40
Checking the washer fluid level ..................................7-40
Parking brake .......................................................7-41
Checking the parking brake .........................................7-41
Fuel filter (for Diesel).........................................7-41
Draining water from fuel filter....................................7-41
Air cleaner ............................................................7-42
Filter replacement...........................................................7-42
Climate control air filter .....................................7-44
Filter inspection...............................................................7-44
Filter replacement...........................................................7-44
Wiper blades.........................................................7-45
Blade inspection ..............................................................7-45
Blade replacement ..........................................................7-45
Battery...................................................................7-48
For best battery service................................................7-48
Battery capacity label ...................................................7-50
Battery recharging .......................................................7-50
Reset items .......................................................................7-51
7
7
Tires and wheels..................................................7-52
Tire care............................................................................7-52
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.............7-52
Checking tire inflation pressure..................................7-54
Tire rotation .....................................................................7-55
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-56
Tire replacement .............................................................7-56
Wheel replacement.........................................................7-58
Tire traction......................................................................7-58
Tire maintenance ............................................................7-58
Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-58
Low aspect ratio tire......................................................7-63
Fuses......................................................................7-64
Fuse/Relay panel description ......................................7-70
Light bulbs.............................................................7-84
Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and
fog lamp light bulb replacement .................................7-85
Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-91
Headlamp and front fog lamp aiming (for Europe)...7-92
Rear combination lamp bulb replacement ................7-97
High mounted stop lamp replacement.....................7-101
License plate light bulb replacement.......................7-101
Interior light bulb replacement..................................7-102
Appearance care................................................7-103
Exterior care ..................................................................7-103
Interior care ...................................................................7-109
Emission control system ...................................7-111
Crankcase emission control system.........................7-111
Evaporative emission control system ......................7-111
Exhaust emission control system .............................7-112
7-3
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OAD075100L
■
Gasoline Engine (Nu 2.0 MPI)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Battery
7-4
Maintenance
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Battery
OAD075101L
■
Gasoline Engine (Gamma 1.6 MPI)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
7-5
7
Maintenance
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Battery
OAD075001
■
Diesel Engine (UII 1.6 TCI)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
7-6
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
HYUNDAI’s high service quality
standards and receives technical
support from HYUNDAI in order to
provide you with a high level of serv-
ice satisfaction.
Owner’s responsibility
Maintenance service and record reten-
tion are the owner’s responsibility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
Owner maintenance precautions
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury. This
chapter provides instructions only for
the maintenance items that are easy
to perform. Several procedures can
be done only by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.
Your vehicle should not be modified
in any way. Such modifications may
adversely affect the performance,
safety or durability of your vehicle
and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties cover-
ing the vehicle.
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details,
read the separate Service Passport
provided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any servicing or
maintenance procedure, we rec-
ommend that the system be serv-
iced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
7-7
7
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance vehicle
checks are generally not covered by
warranties and you may be charged
for labor, parts and lubricants used.
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
If you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ALWAYS follow these precau-
tions for performing mainte-
nance work:
• Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever
into the P (Park, for automatic
transmission vehicle) posi-
tion, apply the parking brake,
place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Block the tires (front and
back) to prevent the vehicle
from moving.
Remove loose clothing or jew-
elry that can become entan-
gled in moving parts.
• If you must run the engine
during maintenance, do so
out doors or in an area with
plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-
ing materials away from the
battery and fuel-related parts.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Check for low or under-inflated
tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of exhaust
fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice if there is any
increased steering effort or loose-
ness in the steering wheel, or
change in its straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or
“hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission fluid
level.
• Check the automatic transmission
P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehi-
cle (water dripping from the air con-
ditioning system during or after use
is normal).
7-8
Maintenance
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. This may result in
coolant being blown out of the
opening and cause serious
burns and other injuries.
WARNING
Diesel Engine
Never manipulate or modify the
injection system while running
the diesel engine or within 30
seconds after turning OFF the
diesel engine. The high-pressure
pump, high-pressure pipes, rail,
and injectors are still subject to
the high pressure right after
stopping the diesel engine.
When the fuel leakage vents out,
it may cause serious body injury.
Any people, who are implement-
ed with the artificial cardiac
pacemaker, should remain away
from the ECU or the wiring har-
ness by at least 30 cm, while run-
ning the diesel engine. The high
currents of the electric engine
control system produce a con-
siderable amount of magnetic
fields.
WARNING
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare for tires
that are worn, show uneven wear,
or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
At least twice a year:
(i.e., every Spring and Fall)
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and
function.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather
strips.
• Lubricate door checker
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
7-9
7
Maintenance
7-10
Maintenance
SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply.
If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km(10 miles) in
freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
• Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition
If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After the periods or distance shown in the chart, continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
7-11
7
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).
Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
4
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Normal Maintenance Schedule – Gasoline Engine (For Europe)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Drive belts *
1
At first, inspect at 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine oil and engine oil filter *
2
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner filter
I I R I I R I I
Spark plugs *
3
Replace every 165,000 km (102,500 miles)
Valve clearance (For Gamma 1.6) *
4
I
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
I I
Fuel tank air filter (if equipped)
I I
Vacuum hose
I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
7-12
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.) – Gasoline Engine (For Europe)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Fuel filter *
5
I I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections
I I
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day
At first, inspect at 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine coolant *
6
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *
7
Battery condition
I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections
I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal, Clutch pedal (if equipped)
I I I I
Parking brake
I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob-
lem etc, we recommend replacing the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consulting with an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
6
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
7
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
7-13
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.) – Gasoline Engine (For Europe)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
8
: Manual transmission fluid should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Brake/clutch fluid
I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads
I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots
I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints
I I I I I I I I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body
I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)
I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)
I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R R R R
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
I I
Automatic transmission fluid
(if equipped)
No check, No service required
Exhaust system
I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
7-14
Maintenance Under Severe Usage and Low Mileage Conditions – Gasoline Engine (For Europe)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe and low mileage driving
conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 7,500 km (4,650 miles) or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs
R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
A, B, H, I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
7-15
7
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez-
ing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine
F : Driving in heavy traffic area
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly
H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 140 km/h (87 mile/h)
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions and under
15,000 km per year.
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, F, G, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped) R Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles) A, C, F, G, I
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).
Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: Middle East includes Morocco, Sudan and Egypt.
*
4
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bottle of
additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Drive belts *
1
I I I I
Engine oil and engine
oil filter *
2
For Middle East *
3
,
Central & South America
Replace every 10,000 km (6,200 miles) or 12 months
Except Middle East *
3
,
Central & South America
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner filter
For Middle East *
3
R R R R R R R R
Except Middle East *
3
I I R I I R I I
Fuel additives *
4
Add every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
7-16
Normal Maintenance Schedule – Gasoline Engine (Except Europe)
7-17
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.) – Gasoline Engine (Except Europe)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
6
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
*
7
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
etc, we recommend replacing the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consulting with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Spark plugs *
5
Replace every 165,000 km (102,500 miles)
Valve clearance *
6
(For Gamma 1.6) I
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap I I
Fuel tank air filter (if equipped)
I R I R
Vacuum hose I I I I I I I I
Fuel filter *
7
I R I R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
7-18
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.) – Gasoline Engine (Except Europe)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
8
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory.
An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
9
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day
At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine coolant *
8
At first replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months *
9
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal, Clutch pedal (if equipped) I I I I
Parking brake I I I I
Brake/clutch fluid I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-19
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.) – Gasoline Engine (Except Europe)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
10
: Manual transmission fluid should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R R R R R R R R
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) *
10
I I
Automatic transmission fluid
(if equipped)
No check, No service required
Exhaust system
I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
For Middle East *
3
,
Central & South America
R
Replace every 5,000 km (3,100 miles)
or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, K, L
Except Middle East *
3
,
Central & South America
R
Replace every 7,500 km (4,650 miles)
or 6 months
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
A, B, H, I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance
7-20
Maintenance Under Severe Usage and Low Mileage Conditions – Gasoline Engine (Except Europe)
7-21
7
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez-
ing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine
F : Driving in heavy traffic area
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly
H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 140 km/h (87 mile/h)
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, F, G, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped) R Every 100,000 km (62,000 miles) A, C, F, G, I
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Maintenance
7-22
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Inspect and if necessary correct or replace. Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary correct or
replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount oil can dam-
age the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
Normal Maintenance Schedule – Diesel Engine
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000
12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100
Km×1,000
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Drive belts *
1
At first, inspect at 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48 months,
after every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months
Engine oil and engine oil filter *
2
*
3
R R R R R R R R
Tensioner/idler/damper pulley Inspect when replacing the drive belt
Air cleaner filter I R I R I R I R
Fuel filler cap I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-23
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.) – Diesel Engine
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
4
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel < "EN590 or equivalent">.
If the diesel fuel specification doesn't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are some important safety
matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and we recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100
Km×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Fuel filter cartridge *
4
I I R I I R I I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day
Inspect “Water pump” when replacing the drive belt or timing belt
Engine coolant *
5
At first, replace at 100,000 km (62,500 miles) or 60 months:
after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months *
6
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
7-24
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.) – Diesel Engine
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: When adding coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
6
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100
Km×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
All electrical systems I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Parking brake I I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch fluid I R I R I R I R
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I
Drum brakes and linings (if equipped) I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-25
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.) – Diesel Engine
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
7
: Manual transmission/Dual clutch transmission fluid should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100
Km×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Drive shaft and boots I I I I I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 18 months
Manual transmission fluid *
7
(if equipped) Inspect every 60,000 km or 48 months
Dual clutch transmission fluid *
7
(if equipped) I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
7-26
Maintenance Under Severe Usage and Low Mileage Conditions – Diesel Engine
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 10,000 km (6,200 miles) or 6 months
A, B, C, F, G, H,
I, J, K, L
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, K
Dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
A, C, D, E, G, H,
I, K
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
7-27
7
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or
in very cold weather
E : Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine
F : Driving in heavy traffic area
G : Driving in mountainous areas.
H : Towing a trailer
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle tow-
ing
J : Driving in very cold weather
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K, L
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
7-28
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
We recommend that the fuel filter be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. We recommend that the fuel
lines, fuel hoses and connections be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
When you are inspecting the
belt, place the ignition switch to
the LOCK/OFF or ACC position.
CAUTION
7-29
7
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
We recommend that the air cleaner
filter be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. We recommend that the system
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Engine coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic transmission fluid
Automatic transmission fluid should
not be checked under normal usage
conditions.
We recommend that the automatic
transmission fluid changed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule.
Information
Automatic transmission fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transmission fluid will begin to look
darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission mal-
function and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transmission fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
NOTICE
i
Do not disconnect and inspect
spark plugs when the engine is
hot. You may burn yourself.
WARNING
7-30
Maintenance
Manual transmission fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Dual clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the dual clutch transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake lever (or
pedal) and cables.
Brake pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, refer to
the HYUNDAI web site.
(http://brakeman
ual.hmc.co.kr)
7-31
7
Maintenance
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
7-32
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
• When you wipe the oil level
gauge, you should wipe it with a
clean cloth. When mixed with
debris, it can cause engine dam-
age.
NOTICE
Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
WARNING
OAD075062L
OAD075102L
OAD075004
■ Gamma 1.6 MPI
■ Nu 2.0 MPI
■ UII 1.6 TCI
7-33
7
Maintenance
- Diesel Engine
Overfilling the diesel engine oil
may cause severe dieseling due to
the churning effect. It may damage
the diesel engine with the abrupt
engine speed incensement, com-
bustion noise, and white smoke
emission.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in Chapter 8.)
NOTICE
OAD075063L
OAD075103L
OAD075006
■ Gamma 1.6 MPI
■ Nu 2.0 MPI
■ UII 1.6 TCI
7-34
Maintenance
Checking the engine oil and
filter
We recommend that the engine oil
and filter be replaced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap
and warm water as soon as pos-
sible after handling used oil.
WARNING
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
Doing so might lead to cooling
system and engine damage
and could result in serious
personal injury from escaping
hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Use
extreme care when removing
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while
the pressure is released from
the cooling system.
When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not oper-
ating, do not remove the radia-
tor cap or the drain plug while
the engine and radiator are
hot. Hot coolant and steam
may still blow out under pres-
sure, causing serious injury.
OAD075009
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least
once a year, at the beginning of the
winter season, and before traveling
to a colder climate.
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may
cause cracks in the engine. To
prevent damage, add engine
coolant slowly in small quanti-
ties.
• Do not drive with no engine
coolant. It may cause water pump
failure and engine seizure, etc.
Checking the engine coolant
level
NOTICE
7-35
7-36
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks
on the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the
level to F (MAX), but do not overfill.
If frequent additions are required, we
recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is con-
trolled by engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may some-
times operate even when the
engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling
fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blades. As the
engine coolant temperature
decreases, the electric motor
will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
The electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
WARNING
OAD075008
OAD075007
■ Gasoline engine
■ Diesel engine
7-37
7
Maintenance
• Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
WARNING
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an phosphate based
ethylene-glycol coolant to prevent
corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Information
If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be the
same quantity of each. It is suitable to
use for most temperature ranges of
-35°C (-31°F) and higher.
Changing the coolant
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Put a thick cloth or fabric around
the radiator cap before refilling
the coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as generator.
NOTICE
i
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
7-38
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the brake/clutch
fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch
fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
Use only the specified brake/clutch
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubri-
cants and capacities” in chapter 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
Information
Before removing the brake/clutch
filler cap, read the warning on the cap.
Information
Clean filler cap before removing.
Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/clutch
fluid from a sealed container.
i
i
i
OAD075010
In the event the brake/clutch
system requires frequent addi-
tions of fluid, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
7-39
7
Maintenance
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint,
as paint damage will result.
Brake/clutch fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extend-
ed time should never be used as
its quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Don't put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
A few drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in your
brake/clutch system can damage
brake/clutch system parts.
NOTICE
When changing and adding
brake/clutch fluid, handle it
carefully. Do not let it come in
contact with your eyes. If brake/
clutch fluid should come in con-
tact with your eyes, immediately
flush them with a large quantity
of fresh tap water. Have your
eyes examined by a doctor as
soon as possible.
WARNING
7-40
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary.
Plain water may be used if washer
fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
- Coolant
Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
NOTICE
OAD075011
• Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum-
stances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reser-
voir. Damage to the vehicle or
occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and
animals. Do not drink and
avoid contacting windshield
washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
WARNING
7-41
7
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 5~6 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
Draining water from fuel filter
The fuel filter in the diesel engine
operates the critical function of sepa-
rating water from the fuels and accu-
mulating the water in its bottom.
When enough water is accumulated
inside the fuel filter, the warning light
illuminates with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
In this case, we recommend you to
have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
When the accumulated water is
not drained at a proper timing,
water may permeate in the fuel fil-
ter, damaging the major vehicle
components, such as the fuel sys-
tem.
Information
When replacing the fuel filter car-
tridge, we recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
NOTICE
OAD055008
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
7-42
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
The air cleaner filter can be cleaned
for inspection using compressed air.
Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,
as water will damage the filter.
If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be
replaced.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
OAD075015 OAD075016
OAD075014
OAD075013
■ Gasoline engine
■ Diesel engine
7-43
7
Maintenance
Information
If the vehicle is operated in
extremely dusty or sandy areas,
replace the element more often
than the usual recommended
intervals (refer to “Maintenance
Under Severe Usage Conditions”
in this chapter).
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed. This will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts,
use of non-genuine parts could
damage the air flow sensor.
NOTICE
i
7-44
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more fre-
quently and replaced earlier. When
you, the owner, replace the climate
control air filter, replace it performing
the following procedure, and be care-
ful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
Install a new climate control air filter
in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol(
↓
) facing downwards.
Otherwise, the climate control
effects may decrease, possibly
with a noise.
Filter replacement
1.With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
2.Remove the support strap (1).
3.Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case while pressing the lock on
the both side of the cover.
4.Replace the climate control air filter.
5.Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
NOTICE
OAD075018
OAD075017
OAD075019
OHG075041
7-45
7
Maintenance
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it
may chip or crack the windshield.
CAUTION
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Information
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manu-
ally.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper mal-
function and failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
OLMB073019
7-46
Maintenance
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
OLMB073020
OLMB073021
OLMB073022
OLF074017
7-47
7
Maintenance
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).
Then lift up the wiper blade (2).
3. While pushing the lock (3), pull
down the wiper blade (4).
4. Remove the wiper blade from the
wiper arm (5).
5. Install a new wiper blade assem-
bly in the reverse order of removal.
6. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
OAD075074L
OAD075075L OAD075076L
7-48
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
Information
The battery, which is originally
installed in your vehicle, is mainte-
nance free. However, your vehicle is
equipped with a battery marked with
LOWER and UPPER on the side, you
should check the electrolyte level.
The electrolyte level should be
between the LOWER and the
UPPER. When the electrolyte level is
low, add distilled (or de-mineralized)
water. (Never add sulfuric acids or
other electrolyte).
Be careful not to spill distilled (or de-
mineralized) water over the battery
surface or other adjacent components.
Also, do not overfill the battery cells.
If not, it may corrode the battery or
other components. Finally, securely
close the cell cap. However, we recom-
mend you to contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for better battery
service.
i
OAD075020
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-49
7
Maintenance
If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
NOTICE
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start
with a low or frozen battery.
7-50
Maintenance
Battery capacity label
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
1. AGM60L-DIN : The HYUNDAI
model name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 100RC : The nominal reserve
capacity (in min.)
5. 640CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 512A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
OLMB073072
■ Example
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precau-
tions:
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery, turn off all accessories
and stop the engine.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature
of the electrolyte of any cell
exceeds 49°C (120°F).
(Continued)
WARNING
7-51
7
Maintenance
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See chapter 3)
• Sunroof (See chapter 3)
• Trip computer (See chapter 3)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 3)
(Continued)
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected.
• Disconnect the battery charg-
er in the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery
terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
7-52
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pres-
sure refer to “Tire and wheels” in
chapter 8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
Tire underinflation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
WARNING
OAD085007L
7-53
7
Maintenance
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been driv-
en more than 1.6 km (1 mile)
since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace
them.
CAUTION
Tire inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
WARNING
7-54
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehi-
cle.
WARNING
7-55
7
Maintenance
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Information
The outside and inside of the unsym-
metrical tire is distinguishable. When
installing an unsymmetrical tire, be
sure to install the side marked "out-
side" face the outside. If the side
marked "inside" is installed on the
outside, it will have a bad effect on
vehicle performance.
i
ODH073802
■ without a spare tire
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances.This may cause unusu-
al handling characteristics that
could result in death, severe
injury, or property damage.
WARNING
7-56
Maintenance
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
NOTICE
OLMB073027
Tread wear indicator
When replacing the tires,
recheck and tighten the wheel
nuts after driving about 1,000
km (620 miles). If the steering
wheel shakes or the vehicle
vibrates while driving, the tire is
out of balance. Align the tire
balance. If the problem is not
solved, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
7-57
7
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) (if equipped) to work
irregularly.
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capa-
bility. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehi-
cle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-58
Maintenance
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
OLMB073028
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlamp aim and
bumper height.
WARNING
7-59
7
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
205/65R16 95H
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
95 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5JX16
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
7-60
Maintenance
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life
(TIN : Tire Identification
Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
tire strength and performance,
decline with age naturally (even
unused spare tires). Therefore, the
tires (including the spare tire) should
be replaced by new ones. You can
find the manufacturing date on the
tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of
the wheel), displaying the DOT
Code. The DOT Code is a series of
numbers on a tire consisting of num-
bers and English letters. The manu-
facturing date is designated by the
last four digits (characters) of the
DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2015.
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
Warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
WARNING
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
7-61
7
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and
material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
7-62
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by the
law.
Tire temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
7-63
7
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
The low aspect ratio tires, of which
aspect ratio is below 50, are
equipped with for the sporty look.
Riding with high aspect ratio tires
may be uncomfortable with unpleas-
ant noises, because the low aspect
ratio tires are optimized for handling
and braking.
The sidewall of the low aspect
ratio tire is thinner than the high
aspect ratio tire. Thus, the wheel
and the tire may be easily dam-
aged. Thus, follow the below
instructions.
- Cautiously drive the vehicle on a
rough road or off the road.
Otherwise, the tires and wheels
may be damaged. After driving
those areas, inspect the tires
and wheels.
- Slowly drive the vehicle to pass
over a pothole, speed bump,
manhole, or curb stone.
Otherwise, the tires and wheels
may be damaged.
- Upon having an impact on the
tire, we recommend you to have
the tires inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
- Inspect the tires every 3,000 km
to prevent damage.
• It is difficult to recognize tire
damage only with eyes. However,
we recommend you to have the
tire checked or replaced upon
detecting even the slightest tire
damage. The tire damage may
leak air from the tire.
• Tire damage, caused by driving
on a rough road, pothole, man-
hole or curb stone, or off the
road, is not covered by the man-
ufacturer’s warranty.
• For further information about
the tire, refer to the label on the
tire sidewall.
NOTICENOTICE
7-64
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse
panel. Before replacing a blown fuse,
turn the engine and all switches off,
and then disconnect the negative bat-
tery cable. Always replace a blown
fuse with one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immedi-
ately consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
i
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
Blown
Normal
Blown
Normal
Blown
OLF074075
Normal
Blown
■ Multi fuse
7-65
7
Maintenance
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the sys-
tem.
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete
fastening fuse or relay may
cause the vehicle wiring and
electric systems damage and a
possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and ter-
minals may be fastened incom-
pletely, and it may cause a pos-
sible fire. If fuses, relays and ter-
minals fastened with bolts or
nuts are blown, we recommend
that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system mal-
function.
NOTICENOTICE
Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the prop-
er fuse - even as a temporary
repair. It may cause extensive
wiring damage and a possible
fire.
WARNING
7-66
Maintenance
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the engine and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuse
panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that
you consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse
of the same rating from a circuit you
may not need for operating the vehi-
cle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced with the
same rating.
i
OAD075022
OAD075021
7-67
7
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, place the fuse switch to the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio system and digital clock must
be reset and the smart key may not
work properly.
Information
If the fuse switch is OFF, the above
message will appear.
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Place the fuse switch in the OFF
position when the vehicle is
parked more than a month to
prevent battery discharge.
• Do not move the transportation
fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse
switch may be damaged.
NOTICE
i
OAD075023
OAD045144/OTL045155L
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
7-68
Maintenance
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the engine off and all other
switches off.
2. Turn all the switches off.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, we rec-
ommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
After checking the fuse box in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse box cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water leaking in.
Main fuse
If an electrical system does not oper-
ate with no blown fuse in the engine
room and inner fuse box, the main
fuse inside the battery (+) cap may
be blown.
The main fuse is heavily connected
to many other parts. In this case, we
recommend you to contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
OAD075025
OAD075024
7-69
7
Maintenance
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information
If the multi fuse is blown, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Blade type fuse
Before inspecting a fuse, you should
turn OFF the engine as well as the
other electric system switches. If a
fuse is blown out, remove the blown-
out fuse and install a new fuse of the
same capacity by using the fuse
puller, which is prepared inside the
fuse box in the engine compartment.
A new fuse may be prepared along
with the fuse puller. However, if not,
you may temporarily select/use a
fuse of the other systems, which do
not affect the vehicle operation, such
as the audio system.
Cartridge type fuse
Before inspecting a fuse, you should
turn OFF the engine as well as the
other electric system switches. If a
fuse is blown out, remove the blown-
out fuse and install a new fuse of the
same capacity. Pay extreme caution
not to damage the blown-out fuse
while removing it.
i
OAD075026 OAD075053 OAD075054
7-70
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay panel description
Driver’s side fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle. It is accurate at the time of
printing. When you inspect the fuse
box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse
box label.
i
OAD075029
OAD075064L
7-71
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
SPARE2 10A Spare
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster
A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module
MDPS1 7.5A MDPS Unit
MODULE7 7.5A
Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module,
Rear Seat Warmer Control Module, Sunroof Motor, Electro Chromic Mirror
A/CON1 7.5A E/R Junction Block (RLY.12, RLY.1B, RLY.13B), Ionizer, A/C Control Module
HTD STRG 15A BCM
WIPER1 25A Wiper Motor, PCM Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay)
HTD MIRR 10A
Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module,
ECM/PCM
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay
MULTI MEDIA 15A DC-DC Converter, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTH E-Call Module
MODULE1 7.5A Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module
Driver’s side fuse panel
Maintenance
7-72
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
BUTTON START3 7.5A Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module
MODULE6 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, BCM
WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch
WIPER2 10A BCM, ECM/PCM
MEMORY1 10A
Driver/Passenger Door Module, Driver IMS Module, BCM, Data Link Connector,
Digital Clock, Rain Sensor, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster,
ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay)
MEMORY2 7.5A Not Used
SUNROOF 20A Sunroof Motor
BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
MODULE3 10A Stop Lamp Switch, BCM, Sport Mode Switch, Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module
MODULE5
MODULE
5
10A
MTS E-Call Module, Crash Pad Switch, A/T Shift Lever Indicator, A/V &,
Navigation Head Unit, A/C Control Module, Console Switch LH/RH,
Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, DC-DC Converter,
Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module,
Rear Seat Warmer Control Module, Driver Ims Module
Driver’s side fuse panel
7-73
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
SPARE3
SPARE
3
15A Spare
SPARE5
SPARE
5
25A Spare
S/HEATER REAR
RR
25A Rear Seat Warmer Control Module
AMP
AMP
25A DC-DC Converter, AMP
SPARE4
SPARE
4
20A Spare
BUTTON START2
2
7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
IG1
IG1
25A PCB Block (Fuse : F9, F10B, F12, F13) E/R Junction Block (RLY.13A)
AEB
AEB
10A Not Used
MODULE4
MODULE
4
10A Parking Assist Buzzer, BCM, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH
P/WDW RH
RH
25A Power Window RH Rleay Driver Safety Power Window Module (RHD)
TRUNK 10A Trunk Relay, Trunk Lid Latch
P/SEAT DRV
DRV
30A Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Ims Module
Driver’s side fuse panel
Maintenance
7-74
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
S/HEATER
FRONT
FRT
20A Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
START 7.5A
Burglar Alarm Relay, Transmission Range Switch, Ignition Lock & Clutch Switch,
Smart Key Control Module, ECM/PCM, E/R Jnction Block (RLY.4)
BUTTON START1
1
15A Smart Key Control Module
A/CON2
2
10A E/R Junction Block (RLY.12), Blower Motor, Blower Resistor, A/C Control Module
SPARE1
SPARE
1
20A Spare
P/WDW LH
LH
25A Power Window LH Rleay Driver Safety Power Window Module (LHD)
INTERIOR LAMP 10A
Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Trunk Room Lamp, Front Vanity Lamp, LH/RH,
Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp
MODULE2
MODULE
2
10A
Digital Clock, USB Charging Connector, MTS E-Call Module, Smart Key Control,
Module, BCM, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Power Outside Mirror Switch,
DC-DC Converter, AMP, E/R Junction Block (RLY.14)
Driver’s side fuse panel
Engine compartment fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle. It is accurate at the time of
printing. When you inspect the fuse
box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse
box label.
i
7-75
7
Maintenance
OAD075065L
OAD075027
Maintenance
7-76
Symbol Relay NO. Relay Name Type
R LY. 1 B PTC HEATER #2 Relay MICRO
R LY. 2 COOLING FAN2 Relay MICRO
R LY. 3 PDM #3 (IG1) Relay MICRO
R LY. 4 START #1 Relay MICRO
R LY. 5 A SUB FUEL PUMP Relay MICRO
R LY. 5 B FUEL HEATER Relay (D4FB) MICRO
R LY. 6 PDM #4 (IG2) Relay MICRO
R LY. 7 B/ALARM HORN Relay MICRO
R LY. 8 PDM #2 (ACC) Relay MICRO
R LY. 9 COOLING FAN1 Relay MINI
R LY. 1 0 REAR HEATED Relay MINI
R LY. 1 1 A A/C Relay MICRO
R LY. 1 1 B
PTC HEATER #1 Relay
(D4FB)
MICRO
Symbol Relay NO. Relay Name Type
R LY. 1 2 BLOWER Relay MICRO
R LY. 1 3 A H/LAMP HI Relay MICRO
R LY. 1 3 B
PTC HEATER #3 Relay
(D4FB)
MICRO
R LY. 1 4
POWER OUTLET Relay
(D4FB)
MICRO
7-77
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MAIN 150A Fuse : F28, F29, F30, F31, F34
MDPS1 80A MDPS Unit
BATT5 60A PCB Block (Fuse : F8, F14, F15, F16, Engine Control Relay)
BATT2 60A Smart Junction Block (Fuse : F36, ARISU)
BATT3 60A Smart Junction Block (Fuse : ARISU, IPS)
BATT4 50A Smart Junction Block (Fuse : F20, F26, F27, F33, F34, F35, F41)
COOLING FAN1 50A RLY.9, RLY.2 (DSL)
RR HTD 50A RLY.10
BLOWER 40A RLY.12
IG1 40A Ignition Switch, E/R Junction Block (RLY.3, RLY8)
IG2 40A Ignition Switch, E/R Junction Block (RLY.6)
GLOW 80A Glow Relay Unit
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Maintenance
7-78
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
PTC HEATER1 50A RLY.11B
PTC HEATER2 50A RLY.1B
PTC HEATER3 50A RLY.13B
FUEL HEATER 40A RLY.5B
B/UP LAMP 10A
Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Audio, MTS E-Call Module,
Smart Junction Block (IPS Control Module)
POWER
OUTLET3
20A Cigarette Lighter
POWER
OUTLET2
20A Power Outlet
HEAD LAMP HI 20A RLY.13A
TCU1 15A TCM
VACUUM PUMP1 20A Net Used
A/CON 10A Net Used
COOLING FAN2 40A RLY.9, RLY.2 (GSL)
Engine compartment main fuse panel
7-79
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
BATT1 40A
Smart Junction Block (LEAK CURRENT AUTOCUT DEVICE,
Fuse : F10, F12, F21, F29, F38)
DCT1 40A TCM
DCT2 40A TCM
B/ALARM HORN 10A R LY. 7
S/FUEL PUMP 15A R LY. 5
ABS1 40A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS2 30A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
POWER 40A RLY.14
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Maintenance
7-80
Engine compartment main fuse panel - PCB Block (Gamma 1.6 MPI)
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
SNSR2 10A
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
E/R Junction Block (RLY.2, RLY.9)
ECU2 15A -
ECU1 10A ECM/PCM
INJ. 15A INJECTOR #1~#4
SNSR1 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)
IGN. 15A Ignition Coil #1~#4, Condenser
SNSR3 20A Fuel Pump Relay, Oil Control Valve #1, Oil Control Valve #2
HORN 10A Horn Relay
ECU5 10A ECM/PCM
SNSR4 20A -
ABS3 15A ABS/ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
TCU2 15A Vehicle Speed Sensor, Transmission Range Switch, E/R Junction Block (Fuse : F17)
ECU4 20A ECM/PCM
ECU3 10A ECM/PCM
F/PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
7-81
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel - PCB Block (Nu 2.0 MPI)
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
SNSR2 10A
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
E/R Junction Block (RLY.2, RLY.9), Cold Start Solenoid Valve
ECU2 15A PCM
ECU1 10A -
INJ. 15A INJECTOR #1~#4
SNSR1 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)
IGN. 15A Ignition Coil #1~#4, Condenser
SNSR3 20A Fuel Pump Relay, Oil Control Valve #1, Oil Control Valve #2
HORN 10A Horn Relay
ECU5 10A PCM
SNSR4 20A -
ABS3 15A ABS/ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
TCU2 15A Vehicle Speed Sensor, Transmission Range Switch, E/R Junction Block (Fuse : F17)
ECU4 20A PCM
ECU3 10A PCM
F/PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
Maintenance
7-82
Engine compartment main fuse panel - PCB Block (UII 1.6 TCI)
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
SNSR2 10A
Electronic Vgt Actuator, Egr Cooling Bypass Solenoid Valve,
Stop Lamp Switch, Pm (Particulate Matter) Sensor, Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve,
Rail Pressure Regulating Valve, E/R Junction Block (RLY.2, RLY.9, RLY.5B, RLY,11B)
ECU2 15A -
ECU1 10A ECM
INJ. 15A -
SNSR1 15A Lambda Sensor #1, Lambda Sensor #2
IGN. 15A -
SNSR3 20A Fuel Pump Relay, Air Flow Sensor, Camshaft Position Sensor, Oil Control Valve
HORN 10A Horn Relay
ECU5 10A ECM
SNSR4 20A Fuel Filter Warning Sensor, Glow Relay Unit
ABS3 15A ABS/ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
TCU2 15A TCM, Transmission Range Switch
7-83
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel - PCB Block (UII 1.6 TCI)
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
ECU4 20A -
ECU3 10A ECM
F/PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
7-84
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to replace most vehicle light
bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before you
can get to the bulb. This is especially
true for removing the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
NOTICE
If you don’t have necessary
tools, the correct bulbs and the
expertise, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases,
it is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts
of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.
This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the head-
lamp assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is in the LOCK/OFF position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
WARNING
7-85
7
Maintenance
Information
After heavy driving, rain or washing,
headlamp and tail lamp lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused
by the temperature difference between
the lamp inside and outside.
This is similar to the condensation on
your windows inside your vehicle dur-
ing the rain and doesn’t indicate a
problem with your vehicle. If the
water leaks into the lamp bulb circuit-
ry, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is
asymmetric. If you go abroad to a
country with opposite traffic direction,
this asymmetric part will dazzle
oncoming car driver. To prevent daz-
zle, ECE regulation demand several
technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet, down
aiming). These headlamps are designed
not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you
need not change your headlamps in a
country with opposite traffic direction.
Headlamp, position lamp,
turn signal lamp and fog lamp
light bulb replacement
Type A – Standard
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Position lamp
(5) Daytime running lamp (DRL)
(6) Fog lamp (if equipped)
i
i
OAD075048
■ without fog lamp
OAD075031
■ with fog lamp
7-86
Maintenance
Headlamp (Halogen bulb)
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retain-
ing wire by pressing the end and
pushing it upward.
6. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
7. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
OLMB073042L
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will pro-
duce flying pieces of glass
that could cause injuries if
broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
WARNING
OAD075032
High
Low
7-87
7
Maintenance
8. Connect the headlamp bulb sock-
et-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
6.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7.Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Daytime running lamp/
Position lamp/Fog lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
i
OAD075033
7-88
Maintenance
Type B - LED Daytime running
lamp
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Position lamp/
Daytime running lamp (DRL)
(5) Fog lamp
Type C - HID headlamp
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Position lamp/
Daytime running lamp (DRL)
(5) Fog lamp
Halogen Headlamp
(Type B Low/High, Type C High)
OAD075031
OAD075031
OLMB073042L
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will pro-
duce flying pieces of glass
that could cause injuries if
broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
WARNING
7-89
7
Maintenance
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retain-
ing wire by pressing the end and
pushing it upward.
6. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
7. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
8. Connect the headlamp bulb sock-
et-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
OAD075032
High
Low
7-90
Maintenance
HID Headlamp (Type C Low)
If the HID lamp does not operate, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs.
HID lamps are estimated by the man-
ufacturer to last twice as long or
longer than halogen bulbs depending
on their frequency of use. They will
probably require replacement at some
point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling
the headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immedi-
ately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-
ing components are more complex
than conventional halogen bulbs thus
have higher replacement cost.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
i
HID Headlight low beam
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, we recom-
mend that the system be
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
OAD075033
7-91
7
Maintenance
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
6.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7.Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Daytime running lamp/
Position lamp/Fog lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Side repeater lamp replace-
ment
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAD075035
7-92
Maintenance
Headlamp and front fog lamp
aiming (For Europe)
Headlamp aiming
1. Inflate the tires to the specified
pressure and remove any loads
from the vehicle except the driver,
spare tire, and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a
flat floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines
passing through respective head
lamp centers) and a horizontal line
(Horizontal line passing through
center of head lamps) on the
screen.
4. With the headlamp and battery in
normal condition, aim the head-
lamps so the brightest portion falls
on the horizontal and vertical
lines.
5. To aim the low beam left or right,
turn the driver clockwise or coun-
terclockwise. To aim the low beam
up or down, turn the driver clock-
wise or counterclockwise.
To aim the high beam up or down,
turn the driver clockwise or coun-
terclockwise.
Front fog lamp aiming
The front fog lamp can be aimed as
the same manner of the headlamps
aiming.
With the front fog lamps and battery
in normal condition, aim the front fog
lamps.
To aim the front fog lamp up or down,
turn the driver clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
OAD075066L
OAD075067L
■ without Headlight leveling device
■ Equipped with Headlight leveling device
7-93
7
Maintenance
Vehicle condition H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3
Without driver 685 (26.97) 662 (26.06)
356 (14.02) 1,466 (57.72) 1,242 (48.90) 1,565 (61.61)
With driver 678 (26.69) 655 (25.79)
350 (13.78) 1,466 (57.72) 1,242 (48.90) 1,565 (61.61)
Unit: mm (in)
Aiming point
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (Low beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (High beam)
H3 : Height between the fog lamp bulb center and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (High beam)
W3 : Distance between the two fog lamp bulbs centers
OAD075068L
<Ground Height>
<Distance between lamps>
7-94
Maintenance
Headlamp low beam (LHD side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If headlamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
OAD075071L
■ Based on 10m screen
7-95
7
Maintenance
Headlamp low beam (RHD side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If headlamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
W1
Low Beam)
CAR AXIS
CUT-OFF LINE
Horizontal line of head
lamp bulb center
Vertical line of the left
head lamp bulb center
Vertical line of the right head
lamp bulb center
GROUND
100±20
H1
Low beam)
OAD075072L
■ Based on 10m screen
7-96
Maintenance
Front fog lamp
1. Turn the front fog lamp on without the driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).
Vertical line of the left fog lamp bulb center
Vertical line of the right fog lamp bulb center
H3 (Front fog)
CAR AXIS
Upper limit
Horizontal line of fog lamp bulb center
CUT-OFF LINE
W3 (Front fog)
GROUND
OAD075073L
■ Based on 10m screen
7-97
7
Maintenance
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
(1) Tail/Stop lamp
(2) Tail lamp
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Back-up lamp
(5) Fog lamp (if equipped)
Outside lamp
1.Open the trunk lid.
2.Remove the service cover by
pulling out the service cover.
OAD075036
■ Type A (Bulb)
OAD075036
■ Type B (LED)
OAD075036
■ Type C (LED with fog lamp)
OAD075049
7-98
Maintenance
3.Loosen the assembly retaining
nuts.
4.Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the
vehicle.
Stop/Tail lamp and turn signal
lamp
5.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
OAD075051
OAD075050
OAD075037
OAD075038
■ Type A
■ Type B, C
Tail/stop
Turn signal
Turn signal
7-99
7
Maintenance
6.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
8.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Inside lamp
1.Open the trunk.
2.Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove the
cover.
3.Disconnect the connector and then
remove the nuts by turning the nuts
counter clockwise.
Back up lamp
1.Take the light assembly out.
OAD075055
OAD075052
OAD075056
7-100
Maintenance
2.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
3.Remove the bulb by pulling it out
4.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket.
5.Install the light assembly to the
trunk.
6.Reinstall the nuts and connector
and then the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
Tail and rear fog lamp (if equipped)
4.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
6.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
7.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
OAD075069L
OAD075070L
■ Type A
■ Type B, C
Back up
Tail
Fog
(if equipped)
Fog
(if equipped)
Back up
7-101
7
Maintenance
High mounted stop lamp
replacement
1.Open the trunk.
2.Remove the socket by turning it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots.
3.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
4.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
5.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
License plate light bulb
replacement
1.Remove the cover by pressing it as
direction of the arrows.
2.Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3.Install a new bulb.
4.Reinstall in the reverse order.
OAD075041
OAD075042
OAD075043
7-102
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior
light housing.
2.Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3.Install a new bulb in the socket.
4.Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
■ Map lamp
OAD075044
OAD075045
■ Luggage room lamp
■ Sunvisor lamp
OAD075047
OAD075046
■ Room lamp
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
WARNING
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
CAUTION
7-103
7
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted
surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
• Do not use strong soap, chemi-
cal detergents or hot water, and
do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the interi-
or.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
NOTICE
7-104
Maintenance
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical cir-
cuits located in the engine com-
partment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and
similar materials with a spot remover
will usually strip the wax from the fin-
ish. Be sure to re-wax these areas
even if the rest of the vehicle does
not yet need waxing.
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plat-
ed or anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to the
protective coating and cause
discoloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
OLMB073082
7-105
7
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body
shop applies anti-corrosion materi-
als to the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end of
each winter. Pay special attention to
these areas because it is difficult to
see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down the
road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes
that should not be allowed to clog with
dirt; trapped water in these areas can
cause rusting.
NOTICE
7-106
Maintenance
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with
a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum
wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salt-
ed roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleanser con-
taining acid or alkaline deter-
gents.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produces cars of the
highest quality. However, this is only
part of the job. To achieve the long-
term corrosion resistance your vehi-
cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
tion and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the car.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
NOTICE
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
7-107
7
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car
is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your car clean and free of mud
or accumulations of other materials.
This applies not only to the visible
surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the fol-
lowing:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your car clean and free of
corrosive materials. Attention to the
underside of the car is particularly
important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your car at least once
a month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the
components under the fenders and
other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job; just damp-
ening the accumulated mud rather
than washing it away will acceler-
ate corrosion rather than prevent
it. Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in
removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
7-108
Maintenance
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame mem-
bers, be sure that drain holes are
kept open so that moisture can
escape and not be trapped inside
to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your car in the garage or drive it into
the garage when it is still wet or cov-
ered with snow, ice or mud. Even a
heated garage can contribute to cor-
rosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
7-109
7
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for
the proper way to clean vinyl.
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may
affect the fabric’s appearance and
fire-resistant properties.
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
7-110
Maintenance
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION
7-111
7
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Service
Passport in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
car inspected and maintained by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
For the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from
misfiring during dynamome-
ter testing, turn the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) sys-
tem off by pressing the ESC
switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC sys-
tem back on by pressing the
ESC switch again.
CAUTION
7-112
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
7-113
7
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for cat-
alytic converters (if equipped)
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO poison-
ing.
WARNING
• A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle. Do not park,
idle, or drive the vehicle over
or near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and cat-
alytic system are very hot
while the engine is running or
immediately after the engine
is turned off. Keep away from
the exhaust system and cat-
alytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
WARNING
7-114
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)
(if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
system removes the soot in the
exhaust gas.
The DPF system automatically burns
(or oxidizes) the accumulated soot in
accordance with the driving situa-
tions, unlike a disposable air filter.
In other words, the accumulated soot
is automatically purged out by the
engine control system and by the high
exhaust-gas temperature at normal/
high driving speeds.
However, when the vehicle is continu-
ally driven at repeated short distance
or driven at low speed for a long time,
the accumulated soot may not be
automatically removed because of low
exhaust gas temperature. In this case,
the accumulated soot is out of the
detection range, the soot oxidization
process does not occur, and the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ( )
Illuminates.
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL
for gasoline engine.
• Do not operate the vehicle
when there are signs of
engine malfunction, such as
misfire or a noticeable loss of
performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse
are coasting with the engine
off and descending steep
grades in gear with the engine
off.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not operate the engine at
high idle speed for extended
periods (5 minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with
any part of the engine or
emission control system. All
inspections and adjustments
must be made by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low
fuel level. If you run out of
gasoline, it could cause the
engine to misfire and result in
excessive loading of the cat-
alytic converter.
CAUTION
7-115
7
Maintenance
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
stops illuminating, when the driving
speed exceeds 60 km/h (37mph), or
when the engine rpm is between
1,500 and 2,500 with the gear in the
2nd position or above for approxi-
mately 25 minutes.
When the MIL continuously blinks or
the warning message “Check exhaust
system” illuminates in the above
cases, we recommend you to have the
DPF system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
When the vehicle is continuously driv-
en with the MIL flashing for an extend-
ed period of time, it may damage the
DPF system and lower the fuel econ-
omy.
Lean NOx Trap (if equipped)
The Lean NOx Trap (LNT) system
removes the nitrogen oxide in the
exhaust gas. The smell can occur in
the exhaust gas depending on the
quality of the fuel and it can degrade
NOx reduction performance, please
use the regulated automotive diesel
fuel.
Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
We recommend you to use only
the regulated diesel fuels, when
your vehicle is equipped with
the DPF system.
When you use other diesel fuels,
which is high in sulfurs (above
50 ppm) or contains unspecified
additives, it may damage the
DPF system and cause the white
smoke emission.
CAUTION
8
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Dimensions..............................................................8-2
Engine......................................................................8-2
Bulb wattage...........................................................8-3
Tires and wheels....................................................8-4
Air conditioning system ........................................8-4
Tire load and speed capacity ..............................8-5
Volume and weight ................................................8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities ...........8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN)....................8-9
Vehicle certification label.....................................8-9
Tire specification and pressure label ...............8-10
Engine number .....................................................8-10
Air conditioner compressor label ......................8-11
Declaration of conformity ..................................8-11
8-2
Specifications & Consumer information
DDIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS
EENNGGIINNEE
Item Nu 2.0 MPI Gamma 1.6 MPI U2 1.6 TCI
Displacement
cc (cu. in)
1,999 (121.98) 1,591 (97.09) 1,582 (96.53)
Bore x Stroke
mm (in.)
81x97 (3.18x3.82) 77x85.4 (3.03x3.36) 77.2x84.5 (3.03x3.32)
Firing order
1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders
4, in-line 4, in-line 4, In-line
Items mm (in)
Overall length 4,570 (179.9)
Overall width 1,800 (70.9)
Overall height 1,450 (57.1)
Front tread
195/65 R15 1,563 (61.5)
205/55 R16 1,555 (61.2)
225/45 R17 1,549 (61.0)
Rear tread
195/65 R15 1,572 (61.9)
205/55 R16 1,564 (61.6)
225/45 R17 1,558 (61.3)
Wheelbase 2,700 (106.3)
8-3
8
Specifications & Consumer information
BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE
* : if equipped
Light Bulb Bulb type Wattage
Front
Headlamp
Low
Type A, B 9005L+ 60
Type C D5S 25
High H7LL 55
Turn signal lamp PY21W 21
Position lamp
Type A W5W 5
Type B, C LED LED
Fog lamp* HB4 51
Daytime running lamp (DRL)*
Type A, B P21W 21
Type C LED LED
Side Repeater lamp (Outside mirror) LED LED
Rear
Rear combination lamp
Outside
Tail/Stop
Type A P21/5W 21/5
Type B, C LED LED
Turn signal PY21W 21
Inside
Tail
Type A P21/5W 5
Type B, C LED LED
Stop LED LED
Back up W16W 16
Fog H21W 21
High mounted stop lamp Bulb type P21W 21
License plate lamp W5W 5
Interior
Map lamp W10W 10
Room lamp FESTOON 8
Sunvisor lamp FESTOON 5
Luggage lamp FESTOON 5
8-4
Specifications & Consumer information
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
Item Tire size
Wheel
size
Inflation pressure, bar (kPa, psi)
Wheel lug nut
torque
kgf·m (lbf·ft, N•m)
Normal load *
1
Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
195/65 R15 6.0J X 15
2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33)
11~13
(79~94, 107~127)
205/55 R16 6.5J X 16
225/45 R17 7.0J X 17
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15
4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60)
T125/80 D16 4.0T X 16
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.
CAUTION
*
1
: Normal load : Up to 3 persons
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Items Weight of Volume Classification
Refrigerant
g (oz.)
500±25 (17.6±0.88)
R-1234yf (For Europe)
R-134a (Except Europe)
Compressor lubricant
g (oz.)
110±10 (3.88±0.35) PAG (FD46XG)
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
8-5
8
Specifications & Consumer information
TTIIRREE LLOOAADD AANNDD SSPPEEEEDD CCAAPPAACCIITTYY
*
1
LI : LOAD INDEX
*
2
SS : SPEED SYMBOL
M/T : Manual Transmission
A/T : Automatic Transmission
DCT : Dual Clutch Transmission
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed Capacity
LI *
1
kg SS *
2
km/h
Full size tire
195/65 R15 6.0J X 15 91 615 H 210
205/55 R16 6.5J X 16 91 615 H 210
225/45 R17 7.0J X 17 91 615 W 270
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15 95 690 M 130
T125/80 D16 4.0T X 16 97 730 M 130
VVOOLLUUMMEE AANNDD WWEEIIGGHHTT
Items
Nu 2.0 MPI Gamma 1.6 MPI U2 1.6 TCI
M/T A/T M/T A/T M/T DCT
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
1,800
(3,968)
1,820
(4,012)
1,770
(3,902)
1,800
(3,968)
1,870
(4,122)
1,900
(4,188)
Luggage volume (VDA)
l (cu ft)
458 (16.2)
8-6
Specifications & Consumer information
RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Nu 2.0 MPI
4.0 l
(4.23 US qt.)
Except Middle East,
Morocco, Sudan, Egypt
API SM*
4
& ILSAC GF-4 (or above)
ACEA A5*
3
(or above)
For Middle East,
Morocco, Sudan, Egypt
ACEA A5*
3
(or above)
Gamma 1.6
MPI
3.6 l
(3.80 US qt.)
Except Middle East,
Morocco, Sudan, Egypt
API SM*
4
& ILSAC GF-4 (or above)
ACEA A5*
3
(or above)
For Middle East,
Morocco, Sudan, Egypt
ACEA A5*
3
(or above)
U2 1.6 TCI
5.3 l
(5.6 US qt.)
with DPF ACEA C2 or C3*
5
without DPF ACEA B4*
5
Manual transmission fluid
Nu 2.0 MPI/
U2 1.6 TCI
1.7~1.8 l
(1.8~1.9 US qt.)
HK MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W MTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX) (API GL-4, SAE 70W)
Gamma 1.6
MPI
1.6~1.7 l
(1.7~1.8 US qt.)
Automatic transmission
fluid
Nu 2.0 MPI
6.7 l
(7.08 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV,
HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
Gamma 1.6
MPI
6.7 l
(7.08 US qt.)
8-7
8
Specifications & Consumer information
Lubricant Volume Classification
Dual clutch transmission fluid
1.9~2.0 l
(2.01~2.11 US qt.)
HK MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
(API GL-4, SAE 70W)
Coolant
Nu 2.0 MPI
M/T
5.9 l (6.23 US qt)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for
aluminum radiator)
A/T
5.8 l (6.13 US qt)
Gamma 1.6 MPI
M/T
5.7 l (6.02 US qt)
A/T
5.6 l (5.92 US qt)
U2 1.6 TCI
6.7 l (7.08 US qt)
Brake/Clutch fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.74~0.85 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
50 l (52.83 US qt.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in the Foreword
chapter.
*
1
: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-
omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
: If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use ILSAC GF-3 (or above) or ACEA A3 (or above).
*
4
: If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
*
5
: If the ACEA C2 or C3, B4 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API CH-4 (or above).
8-8
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those
recommended could result in engine
damage.
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before check-
ing or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
CAUTION
*
1
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-20
*
2
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-30. However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil
using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
3
: Middle East includes Morocco, Sudan and Egypt.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
For Europe
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30*
2
, 5W-40
5W-30
15W-40
10W-30
0W-30
0W-40, 5W-20, 5W-30, 5W-40
Diesel Engine Oil
20W-50
15W-40
10W-30
5W-20*
1
, 5W-30
Except
Europe &
Middle
East*
3
For Middle
East*
3
8-9
8
Specifications & Consumer information
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check
the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s (or front pas-
senger’s) side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN)) VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN
LLAABBEELL
OAD085003
■ VIN label (if equipped)
OAD085001
■ Frame number
OAD085008L
8-10
Specifications & Consumer information
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
TTIIRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD
PPRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL
EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR
OAD085010L
■ Gamma 1.6 MPI
OAD085009L
■ Nu 2.0 MPI
OAD085007L
OAD085007R
■ Right-hand drive
■ Left-hand drive
OAD085006
■ U2 1.6 TCI
8-11
8
Specifications & Consumer information
A compressor label informs you the
type of compressor your vehicle is
equipped with such as model, suppli-
er part number, production number,
refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).
The radio frequency components of
the vehicle comply with requirements
and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1995/5/EC.
Further information including the
manufacturer's declaration of con-
formity is available on HYUNDAI
web site as follows:
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
CE0678
DDEECCLLAARRAATTIIOONN OOFF
CCOONNFFOORRMMIITTYY
■ Example
OHC081001
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNEERR
CCOOMMPPRREESSSSOORR LLAABBEELL
